Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 410

GE Medical Systems

Technical
Publication

Direction 5123446-100
Revision 14
Precision RXi System Installation Manual

42011J
GE Medical Systems

Blank page

II Precision RXi System Installation Manual – rev. 14 - section 0


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14

Precision RXi System Installation Manual

1. Installation steering guide..................................................................................... 11


1.1. Mechanical installation.....................................................................................................11
1.2. Electrical connections .......................................................................................................13
1.3. System start up ..................................................................................................................16
1.4. System configuration ........................................................................................................16
1.5. Adjustment ........................................................................................................................16
1.6. System test .........................................................................................................................17
1.7. Covers.................................................................................................................................17

2. Introduction............................................................................................................ 18
2.1. Applicable standards ........................................................................................................19
2.1.1. Safety..............................................................................................................................19
2.1.2. EMC (IEC 60601-1-2:2001/ EN 60601-1-2:2001 / CEI EN 60601-1-2:2003) .............19
2.1.3. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ..........................................................................20
2.2. Tools and materials needed but not shipped with the product.....................................20

3. Equipments data and characteristics................................................................... 21


3.1. Ceiling stand ......................................................................................................................23
3.1.1. Ceiling stand power requirements..................................................................................23
3.1.2. Ceiling stand environmental specifications....................................................................23
3.2. Monitor suspension (option) ............................................................................................24
3.3. Wall bucky .........................................................................................................................25
3.3.1. Wall bucky power requirements ....................................................................................25
3.3.2. Wall bucky environmental specifications ......................................................................25
3.3.3. Main features..................................................................................................................26
3.3.3.1. Al equivalency value......................................................................................................27
3.3.3.2. Bucky LRE and LREFA model .....................................................................................27
3.4. Positioner ...........................................................................................................................28
3.4.1. Positioner power requirements.......................................................................................28
3.4.2. Positioner environmental characteristics........................................................................29
3.4.3. Weights...........................................................................................................................29
3.5. Generator...........................................................................................................................30
3.5.1. Generator power requirements .......................................................................................31
3.5.1.1. Transformer tap changes ................................................................................................32
3.5.2. Power line requirements.................................................................................................34
3.5.3. Generator environmental specifications.........................................................................35
3.6. Console ...............................................................................................................................35
3.6.1. Touch screen power requirements and environmental specifications............................36

October 2009 Page 1


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14
3.6.2. Monitor power requirements and environmental specifications....................................36
3.6.3. B&W monitor power requirements and environmental specifications..........................37
3.6.4. Positioner console ..........................................................................................................37
3.7. Digital system ....................................................................................................................38
3.7.1. Digital system power requirements................................................................................38
3.7.2. Digital system environmental specifications .................................................................38

4. Ceiling stand installation....................................................................................... 39


4.1. General information .........................................................................................................39
4.1.1. Documentation rights.....................................................................................................39
4.1.2. Tests ...............................................................................................................................40
4.1.3. Guarantee .......................................................................................................................40
4.1.4. Product identification.....................................................................................................40
4.1.5. Labels .............................................................................................................................40
4.1.6. CE conformity................................................................................................................40
4.1.6.1. Tag replacement.............................................................................................................41
4.2. Safety measures.................................................................................................................43
4.2.1. Safety measures for the functioning...............................................................................43
4.2.2. Safety measure for maintenance ....................................................................................43
4.2.3. Precaution in using the equipment .................................................................................44
4.3. Equipment description .....................................................................................................44
4.3.1. Intended use ...................................................................................................................44
4.3.2. Equipment parts .............................................................................................................44
4.3.2.1. Longitudinal rails ...........................................................................................................44
4.3.2.2. Transversal bridge..........................................................................................................45
4.3.2.3. Telescopic carriage and stand ........................................................................................45
4.3.2.4. X-Ray system arm of support ........................................................................................45
4.3.2.5. Control box ....................................................................................................................46
4.3.2.6. Equipment schematic .....................................................................................................46
4.3.3. Technical features ..........................................................................................................47
4.3.4. Accessories standardly supplied ....................................................................................48
4.3.5. Tools supplied for the installation..................................................................................48
4.4. Lifting device .....................................................................................................................51
4.4.1. Safety measures for installation .....................................................................................51
4.5. Installation.........................................................................................................................55
4.5.1. Room preparation...........................................................................................................55
4.5.2. Necessary tools for the installation ................................................................................56
4.5.3. Equipment warehousing and moving conditions ...........................................................56
4.5.4. Equipment receiving ......................................................................................................56
4.5.5. Rails mounting ...............................................................................................................61
4.6. Mounting ...........................................................................................................................65
4.6.1. Equipment mounting......................................................................................................65
4.6.1.1. Longitudinal rails mounting...........................................................................................65
4.6.1.2. Transversal rails mounting.............................................................................................65
4.6.1.3. Transversal bridge regulations .......................................................................................67
4.6.1.4. Accessories mounting ....................................................................................................69
4.6.1.5. Mounting of the telescopic stand ...................................................................................72
4.6.1.6. Use of the lifting device for the stand mounting............................................................73
4.6.2. Ceiling stand mechanical preparation ............................................................................74

Page 2 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14
4.6.2.1. X-Ray tube mounting .....................................................................................................78
4.6.2.2. Collimator flange mounting ...........................................................................................81
4.6.2.3. Collimator mounting ......................................................................................................82
4.6.2.4. Collimator rotation screw lock.......................................................................................82
4.6.2.5. Automatic collimator......................................................................................................83
4.6.2.6. Working position identification .....................................................................................83
4.6.3. Electrical parts disposition .............................................................................................87
4.6.3.1. Control board mounting .................................................................................................87
4.6.3.2. A.T. cables mounting .....................................................................................................87
4.6.3.3. Disposition of the micro-switch cables and their connection ........................................91
4.6.4. Stand balancing ..............................................................................................................93
4.6.4.1. Balancing of the X-Ray unit rotating movement on the horizontal axis........................93
4.6.4.2. Vertical movement balancing.........................................................................................93
4.7. Calibrations .......................................................................................................................94
4.7.1. Display calibration .........................................................................................................94
4.7.2. Positioning and regulation of the potentiometer of beam incidence ..............................94
4.7.3. Adjustment of the beam centring and alignment ...........................................................94
4.7.4. End of travel on the rotations .........................................................................................97
4.7.5. Regulation of the electromagnetic brakes for the rotational movements.......................98
4.7.5.1. Regulation of the vertical axis brake..............................................................................98
4.7.5.2. Regulation of the horizontal axis brake..........................................................................98
4.7.6. Automatic collimator calibration ...................................................................................99

5. Monitor suspension installation ......................................................................... 100


5.1. Prerequisites ....................................................................................................................101
5.2. Suspension assembly .......................................................................................................102
5.2.1. Grounding the Portegra2 system ..................................................................................102
5.3. Monitor installation ........................................................................................................103
5.3.1. Double monitor suspension with LCD type monitors..................................................103
5.3.2. Double monitor suspension (for analogical system version) .......................................104
5.3.3. Single monitor suspension with LCD type monitor.....................................................104

6. Table installation ................................................................................................. 105


6.1. Mechanical dimensions overview ..................................................................................105
6.1.1. Non-elevating table ......................................................................................................105
6.1.2. Non-elevating table base plate .....................................................................................107
6.1.3. Non-elevating table fixation by means of small blocks ...............................................108
6.1.4. Elevating table..............................................................................................................109
6.1.5. Elevating table base plate.............................................................................................111
6.1.6. Elevating table fixation by means of small blocks.......................................................112
6.2. Tilting group installation................................................................................................113
6.2.1. Non-elevating table ......................................................................................................113
6.2.2. Elevating table..............................................................................................................115
6.3. Table frame installation..................................................................................................118
6.3.1. Remove the stand group...............................................................................................120
6.3.2. Mount the table in the base support .............................................................................124
6.3.3. Non-elevating tilting group mechanical stop assembling ............................................126
6.4. Stand group .....................................................................................................................127
6.4.1. Stand group assembly...................................................................................................128

October 2009 Page 3


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14
6.5. Installation of the table cables support .........................................................................135
6.6. Power cabinet and control panel ...................................................................................139
6.6.1. Power cabinet...............................................................................................................139
6.6.1.1. Cabinet power positioning ...........................................................................................139
6.6.1.2. Cabinet wall fixation....................................................................................................139
6.6.1.3. Cabinet floor fixation ...................................................................................................141
6.6.1.4. Power cabinet dimensions............................................................................................141
6.6.2. Control panel................................................................................................................142
6.6.2.1. Control panel without support......................................................................................142
6.6.2.2. Control panel positioning.............................................................................................142
6.7. Fan fitting ........................................................................................................................143
6.8. Fitting of the X-Ray tube housing without trunnion ring...........................................144
6.9. Fitting of the X-Ray tube housing with trunnion ring ................................................146
6.10. Collimator flange mounting (for X-Ray tube housing with trunnion ring) ..............147
6.11. Fitting of the collimator..................................................................................................148
6.11.1. R302/006/MLP/A - R503/006/MLP/A collimator fitting............................................149
6.11.2. Power connection.........................................................................................................149
6.11.3. Collimator rotation screw lock.....................................................................................150
6.12. Fan connecting ................................................................................................................151
6.13. Topographic components disposition ...........................................................................152
6.14. Remote controlled table exam room position and connections lengths .....................155
6.14.1. Connection cables identification..................................................................................157
6.15. Electrical connections .....................................................................................................158
6.15.1. Power supply and ground.............................................................................................159
6.15.2. Table connections ........................................................................................................159
6.15.3. Connection of the X-Ray tube cables ..........................................................................159
6.15.4. Connection of the chamber cable DAP........................................................................159
6.15.5. Connection of the cabinet cables .................................................................................159
6.16. Fitting of the detection chamber....................................................................................165
6.16.1. Standard fitting.............................................................................................................165
6.16.2. Reverse fitting ..............................................................................................................167
6.17. Fitting of the grid ............................................................................................................168
6.18. Mechanical stops of the transversal tabletop ...............................................................169
6.19. Fitting of the TV chain ...................................................................................................170
6.19.1. Image Intensifier alignment ........................................................................................178
6.20. Starting up.......................................................................................................................179
6.21. Functioning tests and X-Ray..........................................................................................179
6.22. Final covering operations...............................................................................................180
6.22.1. Tilting group ................................................................................................................180
6.22.1.1. Non-elevating table ......................................................................................................180
6.22.1.2. Elevating table..............................................................................................................180
6.22.2. Stand covering..............................................................................................................183
6.22.3. Covering of the cables on the turret .............................................................................187
6.22.4. Image intensifier covering ...........................................................................................188
6.23. Table collimator configuration ......................................................................................190
6.24. Further important configuration codes ........................................................................191
6.25. Complete disassembly ....................................................................................................192

Page 4 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14
6.25.1. Fitting of the Spot-Film-Device ...................................................................................192
6.25.2. Lateral heads ................................................................................................................193
6.25.3. Fitting of the right head................................................................................................193
6.25.4. Fixation of the back bar................................................................................................195
6.25.5. Fitting of the left head ..................................................................................................196
6.25.6. Fitting of the frame.......................................................................................................196
6.26. Special tools list ...............................................................................................................198

7. Generator, wall bucky and console installation................................................ 199


7.1. Generator.........................................................................................................................199
7.2. Wall bucky .......................................................................................................................201
7.2.1. Wall bucky stand overall dimension and center of gravity..........................................201
7.2.1.1. WS wall bucky stand overall dimension and center of gravity....................................202
7.2.1.2. WS-T wall bucky stand overall dimension and center of gravity ................................203
7.2.2. Required area................................................................................................................204
7.2.3. Room height .................................................................................................................204
7.2.4. Installation....................................................................................................................204
7.2.4.1. Room preparation.........................................................................................................205
7.2.4.2. Necessary tools for the installation ..............................................................................205
7.2.4.3. Equipment warehousing and moving conditions .........................................................205
7.2.4.4. Equipment receiving ....................................................................................................206
7.2.4.5. Wall bucky stand case ..................................................................................................206
7.2.5. Mounting of the wall bucky stand fixation only onto the floor ...................................207
7.2.6. Wallstand fixing onto the wall and floor......................................................................209
7.2.7. Unblocking of the vertical carriage ..............................................................................211
7.2.8. Vertical carriage balancing...........................................................................................211
7.2.9. Assembling the wall bucky stand covers .....................................................................212
7.3. Console: display and touch screen mounting ...............................................................213
7.3.1. Spot Film Device and stand group movement reversed (option).................................214
7.4. Monitor cart.....................................................................................................................217

8. Electrical connections.......................................................................................... 219


8.1. Main power supply..........................................................................................................220
8.2. Room electrical connection scheme ...............................................................................221
8.2.1. Digital version ..............................................................................................................221
8.2.2. Analogical version........................................................................................................222
8.3. Ceiling stand connections ...............................................................................................223
8.3.1. Ceiling stand housing connections...............................................................................227
8.3.2. Ceiling stand brakes and switches connections............................................................228
8.3.3. OTS user interface connections....................................................................................232
8.3.4. OTS manual collimator connection..............................................................................233
8.3.5. Ceiling stand brakes and switches connections (automatic collimator version) ..........234
8.3.6. Wall stand cassette presence sensor (automatic collimator version) ...........................237
8.3.7. OTS automatic collimator connection (option)............................................................238
8.3.8. Wall stand cassette dimension detection......................................................................239
8.3.8.1. Automatic collimator calibration .................................................................................240
8.3.9. Vacudap DAP connection ............................................................................................241
8.4. Wall bucky connections ..................................................................................................242
8.4.1. Wall bucky with manual collimation version ..............................................................242

October 2009 Page 5


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14
8.4.2. Wall bucky with automatic collimation version (option) ............................................243
8.4.3. Wall stand with cassette dimension detection configuration .......................................244
8.5. Positioner connections ....................................................................................................245
8.5.1. Power supply and ground.............................................................................................245
8.5.2. Positioner power supply (230 V) .................................................................................245
8.5.3. Positioner 25 S3 board connections (digital version) ..................................................247
8.5.4. Positioner 25 S3 board connections (analogical 512 TV chain version) .....................247
8.5.5. Positioner 25 S3 board connections (analogical TV chain N33 version) ....................248
8.5.6. Positioner remote diagnostic........................................................................................248
8.5.7. Ceiling stand housing parking position connection .....................................................249
8.5.8. Table X-Ray housing ...................................................................................................249
8.5.8.1. Table housing fan.........................................................................................................250
8.5.9. Safety for low ceiling extender ....................................................................................250
8.5.10. Infimed camera / I.I. connections (digital version)......................................................251
8.5.10.1. Infimed camera connection..........................................................................................251
8.5.10.2. I.I. magnification..........................................................................................................251
8.5.10.3. I.I. floor safety..............................................................................................................252
8.5.11. Room double foot switch (option) ...............................................................................253
8.5.12. Touch Screen remote loudspeaker (option) .................................................................254
8.5.13. Remote joystick installation (option)...........................................................................255
8.5.13.1. Cover preparation.........................................................................................................255
8.5.13.2. Table preparation .........................................................................................................256
8.5.13.3. Cable connections ........................................................................................................261
8.5.13.4. Spot Film Device and stand group tilting control ........................................................262
8.6. Analogical 512 TV chain connections (analogical version only) ................................264
8.6.1. Analogical 512 TV chain: camera connection.............................................................265
8.6.2. Analogical 512 TV chain: camera to I.I. magnification connection............................266
8.6.3. Camera 512 to positioner connection...........................................................................266
8.6.4. Camera 512 to generator connection ...........................................................................267
8.6.5. Analogical 512 TV chain to monitor power supply connection ..................................267
8.6.6. Camera 512 to monitor video signal connection .........................................................268
8.6.7. Camera 512 and cart ....................................................................................................268
8.7. Analogical TV chain N33 camera connections (analogical version only) ..................269
8.7.1. Camera N33 to generator connection...........................................................................271
8.7.2. Analogical TV chain N33 camera connection .............................................................272
8.7.3. Camera to positioner connection..................................................................................273
8.7.4. Analogical TV chain N33 camera to I.I. magnification connection ............................273
8.7.5. Analogical TV chain N33 - Generator TDI connection...............................................274
8.7.6. Generator - Positioner connection (N33 analogical version).......................................274
8.7.7. Analogical TV chain N33 power supply and video signals (analogical version only) 275
8.8. GIM Connections............................................................................................................279
8.8.1.1. GIM board connectors scheme ....................................................................................279
8.8.1.2. GIM connection details................................................................................................280
8.9. Generator connection .....................................................................................................282
8.9.1. Cables path...................................................................................................................282
8.9.2. Power connection.........................................................................................................284
8.9.3. Generator – Positioner / GIM interface (TDI 2) ..........................................................285
8.9.4. Generator AEC chambers ............................................................................................287
8.9.4.1. Generator and DSA option (digital version only)........................................................287
8.9.5. Generator DAP chambers ............................................................................................288

Page 6 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14
8.9.6. Generator – X-Ray housings ........................................................................................289
8.9.7. Remote diagnostic connections....................................................................................290
8.9.8. Touch screen signals ....................................................................................................290
8.9.9. Generator – Room interface board ...............................................................................291
8.10. Injector connection (optional)........................................................................................292
8.10.1. 25 S4 injector interface board ......................................................................................293
8.11. Console connection..........................................................................................................294
8.11.1. Power supply ................................................................................................................294
8.11.2. Console monitor connections .......................................................................................294
8.11.3. Video splitter connections (digital version) .................................................................295
8.11.4. Double monitor cart connections .................................................................................296
8.11.5. Modem connections (digital version)...........................................................................297
8.11.6. Touch screen connections ............................................................................................298
8.11.7. Console keyboard connections.....................................................................................299
8.12. Digital PC connections....................................................................................................301
8.12.1. I.T. power supply .........................................................................................................301
8.12.2. Digital PC.....................................................................................................................301
8.12.3. Digital PC ground cable ...............................................................................................303
8.12.3.1. Camera connection.......................................................................................................304
8.12.3.2. Remote diagnostic connection .....................................................................................304
8.13. Intercommunication system connection (option) .........................................................305
8.14. External room light and interlock room door ..............................................................310
8.15. Configuring the overlay for NTSC system ...................................................................311
8.15.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................311
8.15.2. Installing the NTSC overlay patch ..............................................................................312
8.15.3. Removing the NTSC overlay patch .............................................................................313

9. Digital PC configuration ..................................................................................... 314


9.1. Windows auto log-in function configuration ................................................................315
9.2. Local Network (LAN) configuration .............................................................................317
9.2.1. DHCP vulnerability......................................................................................................317
9.2.1.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................317
9.2.1.2. Solution ........................................................................................................................317
9.2.1.3. Disable DHCP client service........................................................................................317
9.2.2. Configure network IP settings......................................................................................320
9.2.3. LAN activity check ......................................................................................................322
9.3. Windows 2000 Professional updating ...........................................................................323
9.3.1. Enabling the internet access through the hospital network ..........................................323
9.3.2. Executing Microsoft Internet Explorer for the first time .............................................324
9.3.3. Microsoft Internet Explorer configuration ...................................................................326
9.3.4. Access the Windows Update web site..........................................................................327
9.3.5. Upgrade the “Windows Update” program ...................................................................327
9.3.6. Update Windows Operating System ............................................................................330
9.4. Genware and GMM_Terminal COM ports configuration .........................................333
9.4.1. Genware COM port configuration ...............................................................................333
9.4.2. GMM_Terminal COM port configuration ...................................................................334
9.5. IIP remote diagnostic program configuration..............................................................335
9.5.1. Local Area Network configuration ..............................................................................338
9.5.2. Modem configuration...................................................................................................340

October 2009 Page 7


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14
9.5.3. Uninstall modems other than MT5634ZBA ................................................................343
9.5.3.1. Disable modems other than MT5634ZBA...................................................................343
9.5.4. Install the MT5634ZBA modem (only if necessary) ...................................................345
9.5.5. Checkout process .........................................................................................................348
9.6. DICOM entities configuration example........................................................................349
9.6.1. Setting up the DICOM CD...........................................................................................350
9.6.2. DICOM storage............................................................................................................352
9.6.3. DICOM print................................................................................................................354
9.6.4. DICOM worklist ..........................................................................................................356
9.7. Language selection..........................................................................................................357

10. Generator and touch screen configuration ....................................................... 358


10.1. Backup the license key....................................................................................................358
10.2. Verify the touch screen configuration...........................................................................360
10.2.1. Communication with digital PC...................................................................................361
10.2.2. Touch screen receptor settings.....................................................................................363
10.2.3. Restore the current APR data.......................................................................................365
10.3. Auto tube calibration......................................................................................................366

11. Backup information............................................................................................. 368


11.1. Creation of the destination directory ............................................................................368
11.2. Backup of the analogical systems ..................................................................................370
11.3. CPI generator backup ....................................................................................................370
11.3.1. Generator settings backup............................................................................................371
11.3.2. Generator installation report backup............................................................................372
11.3.3. Log error backup..........................................................................................................373
11.4. APR backup ....................................................................................................................374
11.4.1. Backup the current APR data.......................................................................................374
11.4.2. Saving the APR files on a PC ......................................................................................375
11.4.2.1. Working with the 12” touch screen..............................................................................375
11.4.2.2. Working with the 15” touch screen..............................................................................380
11.5. Infimed digital PC backup.............................................................................................382
11.5.1. Calibration settings backup..........................................................................................383
11.5.2. System and user configuration settings backup ...........................................................384
11.6. Positioner parameters backup.......................................................................................386
11.7. GHOST: a complete system backup on CD-R/RW / DVD .........................................390
11.7.1. Backup the system with Norton Ghost version 10.......................................................391
11.7.2. Backup the system with Norton Ghost version 7.5 or 8.3 ...........................................393
11.7.3. Make the computer bootable from the CD / floppy .....................................................397

12. Chinese labels ....................................................................................................... 399


12.1. Touch screen label ..........................................................................................................399
12.2. Generator labels..............................................................................................................400
12.3. Monitor suspension label ...............................................................................................401

13. Appendix............................................................................................................... 402


13.1. Dip switches information ...............................................................................................402

Page 8 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14
13.1.1. Positioner dip switches.................................................................................................402
13.1.2. Generator dip switches .................................................................................................404
13.2. Sony DVD video recorder connection ...........................................................................405
13.2.1. Connection to the digital system version .....................................................................405
13.2.2. Connection to the analogical 512 TV chain system version ........................................406
13.3. DAP printer connection..................................................................................................407
13.3.1. Label printer .................................................................................................................407

October 2009 Page 9


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14

Precision RXi System Installation Manual

The Manufacturer can modify / update the present documentation without notice.

Copying and divulgating the present documentation is forbidden without a written manufacturer
authorization.

Revision History

Revision Date Reason for Change


01 July 2004 First version
02 September 2004 M3 version
03 June 2005 M4 version
OTS mounting / connecting, PC configuration, Monitor suspension
04 August 2005
lifting tool.
Improvements and correction:
05 January 2006
Table installation – OTS – Norton Ghost 10 – Chinese Labels.
06 June 2006 Steering guide, asymmetric tabletop displacement.
07 October 2006 512 analogical TV chain, B&W monitor
08 April 2007 New positioner control panel and new touch screen 15”
Collimator with spectral filters, digital system with DVD, new monitor,
09 October 2007
new dual monitor cart.
Tag Replacement
10 March 2008 Replacement Picture 15 – CSA028 page 86 with Picture 15 – CSA028-
A
Replacement Monitor Cart
11 April 2008
NTSC
Mechanical stops of the transversal tabletop
12 September 2008
Replacement Monitor Cart
13 June 2009 New monitor suspension
Added paragraph 6.8 “Fitting of the X-Ray tube housing without
14 October 2009
trunnion ring”

Page 10 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 INSTALLATION STEERING GUIDE

1. Installation steering guide

WARNING! PAY ATTENTION!


This system has been calibrated and tested at the manufacturer's plants according to GEMS
specifications. Dose values and Image Quality meet GEMS requirements and specifications.
You shall call OLC before modifying any calibration or adjustment of monitors, dose values, Image
Quality!

1.1. Mechanical installation

1.1.1 Check PRE-INSTALLATION MANUAL (PIM)


□ Check PIM manual 5123449-100
□ Check if the exam room is in compliance with the room layout

1.1.2 RECEIVE and INVENTORY the System


Unpack the equipment parts and Inventory the equipment by following the procedure in
□ PIM manual 5123449-100 (make also reference to the packing list)
□ Collect “PRODUCT LOCATOR CARDS” and store in a secure location

1.1.3 Fill-in in case of OVERHEAD TUBE SUSPENSION (OTS):


□ Make reference to the installation Manual 5123446-100:chap. 4 page 39
Assemble the rails and anchor them on ceiling anchoring brackets
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 4.5.5 page 61
Lift and position on longitudinal rails the transversal carriage
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap 4.6 page 65
Fix on the transversal carriage the mechanical lift (code CSA011/A)
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 4.4 page 51
Lift and position the over head ceiling suspension (OTS) inside the carriage
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 4.4 page 51
Install X-ray tube and collimator:
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 4.6.2.1 page 78 and following.
□ Complete the installation. Make reference to the installation Manual 5123446-100: chap. 4 page 39

1.1.4 Fill-in in case of MONITOR SUSPENSION:


□ Make reference to PORTEGRA2 Installation Manual PTZ15002E by MAVIG

October 2009 Page 11


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 INSTALLATION STEERING GUIDE

1.1.5 Install the REMOTE TABLE


Position the remote table according to the room layout
□ PIM 5123449 chap. 3.2 or Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 6 page 105
Position the Table base plate according to the room layout
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.1.2 page 107 – 6.1.5 - page 111
Fix Table support to the base plate
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.2 page 113
Remove the table column from transport carriage
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.3 – 6.3.1 page 120
Insert the main traverse in the table support while withdrawing simultaneously the transport carriage
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap 6.3.2 page 124
IN CASE 90/30 REMOTE TABLE mount the mechanical stop on the rack
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.3.3 page 126
Mount the column on the main sliding carriage traverse
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.4 – 6.4.1 page 128
Fix to the base plate the cables support
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.5 page 135
Position the remote table cabinet according to the room layout
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.6 page 139
Postion the remote table consolle according to the room layout
□ In case of integrated console mount the fluoroscopy monitor and the touch screen
Installation manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.6.2 page 142
In case there is an interphone as accessory mount the intephone system making reference to Installation
□ manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.13 page 305
Mount the X ray tube
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.9 page 146
Mount the collimator
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.10 page 147
Mount the fan
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.7 page 143
□ WARNING: DO NOT MAKE ANY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION AT THIS STEP
WARNING: DO NOT MOUNT THE IMAGE INTENSIFIER AT HIS STEP
□ Make reference to 1.2.8 of present steering guide
IN CASE OF NOT ELEVATING REMOTE TABLE (90/30) CHECK THE ASSEMBLE OF THE
IONOZATION CHAMBER, IN CASE IS NOT PROPERLY MOUNTED MAKE REFERENCE TO THE
□ FOLLOWING PROCEDURE.
Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.16 page 165 (chap. 6.16.2 page 167)
CHECK IF THE GRID IS PRESENT, if it is necessary make reference to the following procedure
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.17 page 168

1.1.6 MONITOR SUSPENSION


□ Make reference to PORTEGRA2 Installation Manual PTZ15002E by MAVIG

1.1.7 Install the WALL STAND:


Unpack and position the wall stand
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap. 7.2 page 201
Fix wall stand to the floor or to the wall according to the Wall Stand type
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap. 7.2 page 201

Page 12 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 INSTALLATION STEERING GUIDE

1.1.8 Position GENERATOR CABINET


Position generator power cabinet according to room layout.
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 7.1 page 199
□ Remove covers in order to make electrical connections. chap. 7.1 page.200

1.2. Electrical connections


1.2.1 Electrical assembly consists in exam room cables raceway positioning till final
connections. Please follow the next equipments connections order
□ Connect Overhead Tube Suspension (OTS) Make reference to item 1.2.2 of this steering guide.
□ Connect remote table. Make reference to item 1.2.3 of this steering guide.
□ Connect control panel. Make reference to item 1.2.4 of this steering guide.
Connect monitor suspension. Make reference to PORTEGRA2 Installation Manual PTZ15002E by
□ MAVIG
□ Connect Wall Stand (optional). Make reference to item 1.2.6 of this steering guide.
□ Connect generator. Make reference to item 1.2.7 of this steering guide.
WARNING: Image Intensifier electrical connection can be made after I.I. mechanical assembling. It is
necessary first of all to have remote table connected in order to tilt the table in vertical position (+90) and
□ have access to the Image Intensifier mechanical assembling position.
Make reference to item 1.2.8 of this steering guide.
Connect digital or analogical system if present
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap 8 page 219.

1.2.2 Connect OVERHEAD TUBE SUSPENSION (OTS):


Make cables harness by positioning them into their raceways, up to power cabinet generator
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap 8.3 page 223
In case ceiling suspension has automatic collimation on Wall Stand make reference to Installation manual
□ 5123446-100 from chap 8.3.6 page 237 to chap 8.3.8 page 239
Connect the Microswitch for parking position to the OverHead Tube Suspension(OTS)
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap 8.3.2 page 228 or chap. 8.3.5 page 234

1.2.3 Connect REMOTE TABLE


WARNING: BEFORE MAKING ANY CONNECTION READ THE NOTE IN
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.9 page 146
□ Connect the collimator chap. 6.11.2 page 149
Connect the X-ray tube following the procedure at
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.15.3 page 159 and chap. 8.5.8 page 249
Connect the fan following the procedure at
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap.6.12 page 151 and chap. 8.5.8.1 page 250
Connect the DAP following the procedure at
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap.8.9.5 page 288
Install the cable support on loud speaker
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.5.12 page 254
Connect optional fluoroscopy/radiography foot pedal to the cable support base
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.5.11 page 253
Position the remote table output cable in their raceways according to their destination
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.5 page 245 and following.
Connect the cables to the power cabinet following the procedure in the
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.5 page 245
In case of injector connection (optional) follow the procedure at
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.10 page 292
WARNING: FOR ANY PROBLEM RELATED TO CABLES, CABLES LIST, MAKE REFERENCE TO
□ PIM MANUAL 5123449-100 AND DRAWINGS MANUAL 5123449-100

October 2009 Page 13


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 INSTALLATION STEERING GUIDE
1.2.4 Connect the CONSOLLE:
WARNING: FOLLOWING COMPONENTS ARE STRICTLY RELATED TO THE SYSTEM
□ CONFIGURATION
Connect the touch screen
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.11 page 294
Connect the monitor for fluoroscopy
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.11 page 294
Connect the remote table console
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.11 page 294
Connect the DAP printer (option)
□ Drawings Manual 5142538-100 (cable T12 and T13) (Touch Screen data link COM3)
Connect the interphone (option)
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.13 page 305
Connect the Digital system pc
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.12 page 301
Connect the MODEM
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.11.5 page 297
Connect the Video Splitter
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.11.3 page 295
Connect the mouse
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.12 page 301
Connect the keyboard
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.12 page 301

1.2.5 Connect the MONITOR SUSPENSION (optional):


WARNING: THE TRANSFORMER TO POWER MONITORS IS PLACED INSIDE TABLE CABINET
□ (code 56184)
WARNING THE VGA CABLES MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE VIDEO SPLITTER PLACED IN
□ THE CONSOLE
Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.11.3 page. 295
Connect the monitors
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap.0 page 102

1.2.6 Connect the WALL STAND (optional):


Connect the Wall Stand.
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.3 page 223

Page 14 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 INSTALLATION STEERING GUIDE

1.2.7 Connect the GENERATOR


In order to connect the generator follow the procedure at
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.9 page 282
□ WARNING: FOLLOW THE CONNECTIONS SEQUENCE OF
Connect the Network
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.9.2 page 284
ONLY IN CASE OF DIGITAL SYSTEM –make the interface connection with the GIM module
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.8 page 279
Make the interface connection with the remote table
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.9
Connect the automatic AEC exposure meter
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.9 (8.9.4 page 287)
Connect DSA exposure meter
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.9 (8.9.4.1 page 287)
Connect the DAP
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.9 (8.9.5 page 288)
Connect the High tension cable and the anode cable
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.9 (8.9.6 page 289)
Connect the X ray tube safeties thermal cable
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.9 (8.9.6 page 289)
Connect the Touch Screen
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.9 (8.9.8 page 290)
Set the serial connection for remote diagnostic
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.9 (8.9.7 page 290)
Do the connection on “room interface” board.
Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.9 (8.9.9 page 291)
□ In case of a system with an analogical TV chain system make reference to
Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.6.4, 8.6.5 or 8.7.1, 8.7.7

1.2.8 Connect IMAGE INTENSIFIER


□ At this step it is possible to switch on the remote table and tilt it in vertical position (+90°)
Remove the two mechanical stops of the transversal tabletop
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.18 page 251
Mount mechanically the Image intensifier
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.19 page170
In case of a system with an analogical TV chain system make reference to
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.6 page 264 or chap. 8.7 page 269
In case of a system with a digital system make reference to
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 8.5.10 page 251

WARNING: THE REMOTE TABLE AND GENERATOR ARE CONFIGURED AND ADJUSTED IN
MANUFACTURE. IN ORDER TO MAKE EASY THE PACKING PROCEDURE SOME
INSTALLATION CODES ARE MODIFIED.
THESE CODES MUST BE RESTORED AT THE EQUIPMENT START UP.
IN ORDER TO RESTORE THESE CODES PLEASE MAKE REFERENCE TO THE PROCEDURE
IN INSTALLATION MANUAL 5123446-100 chap. 6.23 page 190 and chap. 6.24 page 191

October 2009 Page 15


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 INSTALLATION STEERING GUIDE

1.3. System start up

1.3.1 System start up


Do all the equipment system configuration checks at the start up of the equipment by following the
□ “Starting UP” procedure
Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.20 page 179.

1.4. System configuration

1.4.1 System configuration


WARNING : Check the exam room measures and configure the system in function of exam room
□ limitations
Check generator configuration
□ Generator Service Manual 5121728–100 /
Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 10 page 358
Check the remote table configuration IN PARTICULAR DO SELECT THE COLLIMATOR TYPE
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.23 page 190 and chap. 6.24 page 191
Check the touch screen configuration and select the language
□ Installation manual 5123446-100 chap. 10 page 358 (make reference to figure at page 361)
Check the Analogical TV chain configuration (in case of analogical TV chain System)
□ Make reference to Task and Procedures Manual 5121726-100 Book 3 chap. “Analog TV Chain”
Check the Digital System configuration (in case of Digital System)
□ Digital service Manual 5121727–100/ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 9 page 314

1.5. Adjustment

Warning: fill in the following items just in case of a system with an Automatic Collimator

1.5.1 Adjustment
WARNING: IN CASE OF OVERHEAD TUBE SUSPENSION (OTS) ADJUSTMENT WITH
AUTOMATIC COLLIMATION ON WALL STAND
□ MAKE REFERENCE TO
Task and procedures manual 5121726 –100 Book 3 chap. “OTS automatic collimator”
Make Over Head Tube Suspension (OTS) Focal Distance adjustment following procedure in Task and
□ procedures manual 5121726 –100 Book 3 chap “Overhead Tube Suspension(OTS)”
Do the collimator mounted on OverHead Tube Suspension (OTS) ADJUSTMENTS following the
□ procedure in
Task and procedures Manual 5121726 –100 Book 3 chap “Overhead Tube Suspension (OTS) ”

Page 16 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 INSTALLATION STEERING GUIDE

1.6. System test

1.6.1 System test


Do the functional tests by following the procedure “FUNCTIONAL TEST”
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.21 page 179
Do the System Back Up
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 11 page 368
Do the HARD DISK GHOST
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 11.7 page 390

1.7. Covers

1.7.1 Covers
For equipment covers procedure make reference to
□ Installation Manual 5123446-100 chap. 6.22 page 180

October 2009 Page 17


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 INTRODUCTION

2. Introduction
This document has the purpose to collect the main information to allow the installation of the Precision
RXi system.

Warning

THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUS TO PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE
EXPOSURE FACTORS, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULES ARE OBSERVED.

Although this equipment was designed and manufactured according to the most up-to-date safety
Standards, the X-ray beam always represents a danger, should not the operator be properly qualified
and trained.

Excessive exposures to X-rays cause damages to the human body: therefore, all the necessary
precautions must be taken to prevent unauthorized or unskilled personnel from operating this
equipment, thus jeopardizing themselves and other people.

Before executing any operation, the person being qualified and authorized to operate this equipment,
must be informed about the protection and safety measures established by the International Committee
for the Radiological Protection, as well as any other relevant national Standards.

For a proper use of this equipment, it is required that the operator should previously and carefully refer
to the present Operator’s Manual.
A special attention should be paid to the sections “Safety Recommendations”, “Protection Measures”,
“Functioning and Safety Controls”.

Note:
This equipment is in compliance with the requirements established by the European Directive 93/42
CEE applying to medical devices, thus it is provided with the EC mark stating the code number
identifying the notified body responsible for carrying out the procedures foreseen for the compliance
certification.

The original document was drawn up in Italian.

The Manufacturer shall decline all responsibility with regard to the good functioning of the
equipment should the installation and/or the maintenance of it be executed by unauthorized
personnel.

Page 18 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 INTRODUCTION

2.1. Applicable standards


Addendum to Installation manual Precision RXi ver. 03 on 10 – December – 2004

2.1.1. Safety
The Precision RXi remote R&F system comply with the following regulatory requirements and design
standards:

• EC Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices (European Community)


• FDA Center for Devices & Radiological Health (CDRH) - 21 CFR title 21 subchapter J
(USA)
• EN 60601-1/IEC 60601-1; EN 60601-1-3/IEC60601-1-3 ; EN 60601-2-7/IEC60601-2-7; EN
60601-2-32/IEC60601-2-32
• CSA 601.1; UL2601.1
• Type of protection against electric shock: Class I equipment
• Degree of protection against electric shock: Type B
• Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water: Ordinary equipment.
• Mode of operation: Continuous operation with intermittent loading (standby - exposure).
• Equipment not suitable for use in presence of a flammable anaesthetic mixture with air or
with oxygen or nitrous oxide

NOTE: all referenced standards are considered to be at the latest revision

2.1.2. EMC (IEC 60601-1-2:2001/ EN 60601-1-2:2001 / CEI EN 60601-1-2:2003)

GUIDANCE AND MANUFACTURER’S DECLARATION – ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSION


The PRECISION RXi remote R&F system is suitable for use in the specified electromagnetic
environment.
The following is the manufacture’s declaration regarding the positioner, X-Ray generator and digital
imaging system and related EMC report as described below:

Device Model EMC Report Laboratory


Positioner Precision RXi-T 80SE00265/1/2 IMQ
X-ray generator Precision RXi-G CPI064-EN1-2 Ultratech
Digital Imaging System Precision RXi-D 3022316.6060112.01 ITS

October 2009 Page 19


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 INTRODUCTION

2.1.3. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)


In accordance with the intended use, this R&F remote system complies with the European Council
Directive concerning Medical Devices. The CE marking affixed to this product signifies this. One of
the harmonized standards of this Directive defines the permitted levels of electromagnetic emission
from this equipment and its required immunity from the electromagnetic emissions of other devices.
It is not possible, however, to exclude with absolute certainty the possibility that other high frequency
electronic equipment, which is fully compliant to the EMC regulations, will not adversely affect the
operation of this system. If the other equipment has a comparatively high level of transmission power
and is in close proximity to the system, these EMC concerns (the risk of interference) may be more
pronounced. It is therefore recommended that the operation of equipment of this type such as mobile
telephones, cordless microphones and other similar mobile radio equipment be restricted from the
vicinity of this R&F remote system.

2.2. Tools and materials needed but not shipped with the product
Tools needed for installation are:
• Drill machine with tips (millimetres tip will be better)
• Allen keys in millimetres (NOT INCHES)
• Wrench keys (for hexagonal head screws) in millimetres (NOT INCHES)
• Set of screwdrivers (French and crossed head)
• Level tool
• Measuring tape
• Digital voltmeter and oscilloscope
• Scaffold (platform) and ladder to reach ceiling suspension.
• GenWare® and a laptop computer for setup and calibration if required (for analogical room
version only)
• A calibrated radiation meter with detectors that will allow for R/min and µR type
measurements (or µGy and Gy/min)
• A strobe or reed type tachometer to verify that the anode is rotating up to speed
• A sufficient selection of patient absorbers to allow AEC and ABS calibration. A suggested
selection is 3/4 inch Al (quantity 2); 1 mm of Cu (quantity 8), Water in containers of 5.0.
10.0, 15.0 cm thickness
• Test phantoms to verify the imaging system with the generator.

Page 20 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS

3. Equipments data and characteristics


All the equipments being part of an X-ray installation must be connected to the electrical mains by
means of a contact, or another multipolar section-switch to be installed by the customer. The X-ray
diagnostic room must comply with the requirements set by the IEC/CEI Standards in force.

The pertinent national regulations must be fulfilled in each relevant country. Anyway, it is strongly
recommended that the compliance with the above-mentioned prescriptions should be observed, unless
these ones are contradictory to the national laws in force for the safety of the operator, patients and
third parties.

Single Double
Ceiling
Monitor Monitor Monitor Wall bucky Table
stand
suspension suspension
Supply 230 (220/240) 230 Vac 220/240Vac
Na Na 100 / 240 Vac
voltage Vac +6% -10% ±10%
Mains 50/60Hz ±0.5
Na Na 50/60 Hz 50 / 60 Hz 50/60Hz
frequency Hz
1.5 / 0.75 A
Max. current Na Na 0.16 A 15 A
rms
300 VA (lamp
Operating of diaphragm 40 VA 3,5 kVA
Na Na 55W (max.)
power 100 W (approx.) (approx.)
included)
10°C to 40°C 10°C to 40°C
Operating (in use) (in use)
10 to 40 °C. 10 to 40 °C. 10 to 40 °C 10 to 40 °C
temperature -20° to 70°C -20° to 70°C
(Storage) (Storage)
Operating 30% to 75% 30% to 75%
Humidity (in use) (in use)
30% to 75% 30% to 75% 30% to 75% 30% to 75%
(non 30% to 95% 30% to 95%
condensing (storage) (storage)
Operating 70 kPa to 110 700hPa to 700hPa to 50 kPa to 106 70 kPa to 106 70 kPa to 106
pressure kPa 1060hPa 1060hPa kPa kPa kPa
418 x 1946 x 836 x 2016 x 210 x 165 x 80
Max 415 x 340 x 83 62 x 222 x 39
440 cm rails 1869 mm (W x 1940 mm (W x cm (W x H x
component mm (W x H x or 65 cm
length H x D) H x D) D) (table on
dimensions D) (W x H x D)
extensible extensible jacks)
Rails and
Max 23 kg (does not 24 kg (does not
transversal 170 kg / 200 660 kg / 790
component include weight include weight 6.2 kg
bridge 175 kg; kg kg
Weight of monitor) of monitor)
stand 140 kg

IMPORTANT
For details about single and double monitor suspension, please make reference to PORTEGRA2
Installation Manual PTZ15002E by MAVIG

October 2009 Page 21


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS

Generator Generator Digital system


Console Touch screen
(65 kW) (80 kW) PC
400 / 480 Vac ± 400 / 480 Vac ±
Supply voltage 19 Vac 24 Vdc 120 Vac ± 10%
10% 3∅. 10% 3∅.
Mains frequency 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60 Hz --- 50/60Hz ±0.5 Hz
125 Amps/phase 155 Amps/phase
at 400 Vac. at 400 Vac.
Max. current Na Na 8A
105 Amps/phase 130 Amps/phase
at 480 Vac at 480 Vac
From table From generator
Operating power 85 kVA 105 kVA 1 kVA
cabinet cabinet
Operating
10 to 40 °C 10 to 40 °C 10 to 40 °C 18 to 30 °C
temperature
Operating
Humidity (non 30% to 75% 30% to 75% 30% to 75% 20% to 80%
condensing
Operating
50 kPa to 106 kPa 50 kPa to 106 kPa 50 kPa to 106 kPa 69 kPa to 106 kPa
pressure
Max component 45.5x123x41 cm 45.5x123x41 cm 36.5 x 32.6 x 8.5
19.5x42x46.5 cm
dimensions (W x H x D) (W x H x D) cm (W x H x D)
Max component
107 kg 107 kg 4.5 kg
Weight

Analogical
Analogical TV Analogical TV
system B&W UPS
chain 512 chain N33
monitor
Supply voltage 24Vdc ± 20% 110 / 240 Vac 24Vdc ± 20% 80 / 138 Vac
Mains frequency Na 50 Hz Na 50 / 60 Hz
Output voltage:
Max. current 0.83 A 450 / 250 mA 0.83 A
100/110/120 Vac
Operating power 20W 50W (approx.) 20W 2kVA 1.6kW
Operating
10 to 40 °C 0 to 40°C. 10 to 40 °C 0 to 40 °C
temperature
Operating
Humidity (non 30% to 75% 10% to 80% 30% to 75% 95%
condensing
Operating
70 kPa to 106 kPa 67 kPa to 106 kPa 70 kPa to 106 kPa ---
pressure
Max component 30.2 x 36.7 x 6 37.3x14x42.4 cm
22.6x12x4.6 cm 23.5x19.2x6.5 cm
dimensions cm (W x H x D) (W x H x D)
Max component
0.55 kg 4 kg 1.5 kg 30 kg
Weight

Page 22 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS

3.1. Ceiling stand

3.1.1. Ceiling stand power requirements

Rated voltage: 230 (220/240) Vac


Mains frequency: 50/60Hz ±0.5 Hz
Max absorbed power: 350 VA (lamp of diaphragm 150 W included)

3.1.2. Ceiling stand environmental specifications

OPERATING
Ambient temperature range: 10 to 40 °C.
Relative humidity: 30% to 75%
Atmospheric pressure range: 70 kPa to 110 kPa

TRANSPORT AND STORAGE


Ambient temperature range: 0 to 50 °C.
Relative humidity: 10% to 90%, no condensation.
Atmospheric pressure range: 50 kPa to 110 kPa

October 2009 Page 23


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS

3.2. Monitor suspension (option)

LCD type: GDS MOLVL1964/MED19.0 inch (48 cm) LCD


TFT IPS gray scale;
Power: 100 / 240 Vac; 50/60 Hz; 2.0 / 1.0 A;
Power consumption: Normal operation 55W (Max.);

OPERATING
Ambient temperature range: 10 to 40 °C.
Relative humidity (non dewing): 30% to 75%
Atmospheric pressure range: 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

TRANSPORT AND STORAGE


Ambient temperature range: -20 to 70 °C.
Relative humidity (non dewing): 30% to 95%
Atmospheric pressure range: 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

IMPORTANT
For details about single and double monitor suspension, please make reference to PORTEGRA2
Installation Manual PTZ15002E by MAVIG

Page 24 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS

3.3. Wall bucky


WS-T - vertically adjustable with tilting device
WS - vertically adjustable

WS-T and WS

3.3.1. Wall bucky power requirements

Rated voltage: 230 VAC +6 -10%


Mains frequency: 50 / 60 Hz
Current absorption: 0,16 A (0,5A transient)

3.3.2. Wall bucky environmental specifications

OPERATING
Ambient temperature range: 10 to 40 °C.
Relative humidity: 30% to 75%
Atmospheric pressure range: 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

TRANSPORT AND STORAGE


Ambient temperature range: -15 to 70 °C.
Relative humidity: 10% to 90% no condensation
Atmospheric pressure range: 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

October 2009 Page 25


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS

3.3.3. Main features


Column stand with floor-wall or floor base fastening
Bucky for radiographic cassettes up to 35x43 cm with counterbalanced vertical movement
Mechanical block on all the movements

Complete with grid and pre-set for measure chamber of automatic exposure control.

Complete with grid and pre-set for measure chamber of automatic exposure control

WS
bucky vertical travel 136.5 cm
movement mode/braking manual/mechanical
balancing mode counterweights
minimum distance from floor of the bucky
67.3 cm
upper edge
weight 170 kg

WS-T
bucky vertical travel 136.5 cm
movement mode/braking manual/mechanical
balancing mode counterweights
bucky tilting -20° e +90°
bucky rotation on its axis 90°
minimum distance from floor of the bucky
64.8 cm
upper edge
minimum distance from floor of the bucky in
69.3 cm
horizontal position
weight 200 kg

Page 26 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS

BUCKY
cassette formats from 13x18 to 35x43 cm
grid characteristics 90 lines/inch R=12:1 F= 180 cm

STANDARD ACCESSOIRES
bucky with cassette sensing
measure chamber of automatic exposure control

OPTION AND ACCESSOIRES


arm support
external cassette holder 35x43

NORMATIVE REFERENCES
standard compliance EN 60 601-1, 60 601-2-32
classification (IEN/ CEI EN 60 601) class I – type B

3.3.3.1. Al equivalency value


The attenuation equivalency value of the front panel is 0.65 mm. Al eq

3.3.3.2. Bucky LRE and LREFA model

Buckys are available in 2 main versions.


LRE for manual collimation.
LREFA for cassette size sensing.

October 2009 Page 27


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS

3.4. Positioner

3.4.1. Positioner power requirements


All the equipments of any X-ray installation must be connected to the electrical mains by means of a
contact or another multipolar sectioning device that has to be installed by the Customer. The room of
the installation must be in compliance with the IEC/CEI or UL/CSA prescriptions in force.
The national regulations applying to X-ray installations must be carried out in all the relevant
countries. Anyway, the compliance with the above-mentioned Standards is strongly recommended, of
course where these are not contradictory compared with the national regulations established in order
to ensure safety for the operator, the patient and third parties.
The sectioning device must be placed inside the exam room, just next to the operator.
Rated voltage: 230Vac or 277Vac (the 277Vac rated voltage is optional)

Rated voltage: 220/240Vac (or 277Vac)


Allowed mains fluctuations: ±10%
Mains frequency: 50/60Hz
Current absorption: 15A
Thermal dissipation: 500W
Protection type: I
Degree of protection: Type B
Electromagnetic compatibility Equipment in compliance with EN 60601-1-2 Standards

Important Note:
Normally the power supply of the remote-controlled table is taken by a 16A, delayed 400Vac nominal,
placed in the mains supply panel board of the exam room, with intervention differential current not
higher than 30 mA in compliance with IEC/CEI Standards.
In case the electrical distribution panel isn’t preset with an ON/OFF switch, the switch must be
accessible to the operator, to make him able to switch ON/OFF the table
In compliance with UL/CSA the equipment must be supplied by two delayed fuse of 16A – 400Vac
with an ON/OFF switch placed in the mains supply panel board of the exam room,
The earth terminal of the equipment must be connected in a visible manner to the earth equipotential
node of the diagnostic system by means of a protection conductor, with the minim section of 10 mm2.
The supply cable from the mains supply panel board to the equipment electrical cabinet must have a
minim section of 2.5 mm2
All the conductors must be made in copper. All the supply connections and earth cables must be in
compliance with the national rules or equivalent.

Page 28 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS
3.4.2. Positioner environmental characteristics

OPERATING
Ambient temperature range: 10 to 40 °C.
Relative humidity: 30% to 75% no condensation.
Altitude: 700 to 1060 hPa

TRANSPORT AND STORAGE


Ambient temperature range: -20 to 70 °C.
Relative humidity: 10% to 90% no condensation.
Altitude: 700 to 1060 hPa

3.4.3. Weights

Elevating Not Elev.


Weight of the equipment 790 kg 660 kg
Weight of the accessories 80 kg 80 kg
Patient’s weight 182 kg 182 kg
Weight of the base plate 100 kg 114 kg
2
Support surface 1,10 m 1,00 m2
Floor minimum bearing 1047 kg/ m2 1036 kg/ m2
Control panel (1) 90÷100 kg
Control panel support base ≈ 0,2 m2
Power cabinet (2) 140÷170 kg
Power cabinet support base 0,2 m2

(1)
The weight of the control panel is given by the weight of the control panel itself plus the weight of the support base in the simple T version.
(2)
The weight of the power cabinet is referred to the complete version.

October 2009 Page 29


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS

3.5. Generator

Figure 1E-1: Major generator subassemblies & power EPROM location

Page 30 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS

Room
Interface
Transformer

Figure 1E-2: Major generator subassemblies (right side and rear)

3.5.1. Generator power requirements


Indico 100 X-ray generators are normally factory-configured for 400 VAC operation. The following
pages detail the procedure for configuring 400 VAC Indico 100 generators for 480 VAC operation.

Rated voltage: 400 / 480 VAC ± 10%, 3∅.


Allowed mains fluctuations: ±10%
Mains frequency: 50/60Hz
Current absorption (65 kW version): 125 Amps/phase at 400 VAC.
105 Amps/phase at 480 VAC
Current absorption (80 kW version): 155 Amps/phase at 400 VAC.
130 Amps/phase at 480 VAC
Standby current: 5 Amps

October 2009 Page 31


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS

3.5.1.1. Transformer tap changes

SWITCH OFF AND DISCONNECT POWER TO THE GENERATOR, AND WAIT


A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE
REMOVING ANY COVERS OR ACCESS PANELS.

Power supply auxiliary transformer


Locate the power supply auxiliary transformer. This is situated under the power input board in the
generator cabinet. Refer to the previous figure Major generator subassemblies (right side and rear).

Referring to the following figure, move the line voltage tap from the 400 VAC position to the 480
VAC position.

Schematic, primary of power supply aux transformer

Room Interface Transformer


Locate the room interface transformer. This is in the upper part of the generator cabinet as shown in
the figure at the previous page Major generator subassemblies & power EPROM location.

Referring to the following figure, change the line voltage taps to the “480 VAC” position. Because
the primary of this transformer consists of two 240 V windings in series, BOTH leads shown in
figure need to be moved from the 200 V taps to the 240 V taps.

Page 32 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS

Schematic, primary of room interface transformer

Dual speed starter


The dual speed starter EPROM needs to be changed from part number 739311 (400 VAC operation) to
part number 739313 for 480 VAC operation. Refer to following steps of this manual for the procedure
to replace the dual speed starter EPROM.

Dual speed starter board


U 26 Refer to fig. “Major generator
subassemblies & power EPROM
location” for location

Figure 1E-6: EPROM location inside the dual speed starter

Switch the generator mains power OFF, AND WAIT 5 MINUTES FOR THE DC BUS
CAPACITORS TO FULLY DISCHARGE.
STEPS 2 AND 3 APPLY TO MILLENIA GENERATORS ONLY. IN INDICO 100
GENERATORS, THE DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD IS FULLY ACCESSIBLE WITH
THE APPROPRIATE GENERATOR SIDE PANEL(S) REMOVED.
Loosen the two nuts securing the clamping bracket at the top of the dual speed starter. Slide the
bracket up and gently remove the dual speed starter assembly. The cables connected to the
dual speed starter do not need to be removed in order to change the EPROM.
Carefully rotate the dual speed starter chassis to fully expose the dual speed starter board inside the
unit.
Locate and carefully remove the existing EPROM on the dual speed starter board (U26, refer to
figure 1E-6).
Carefully insert the replacement EPROM into the socket observing the orientation per figure 1E-6.

October 2009 Page 33


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS
Reinstall the dual speed starter assembly by reversing steps 2 and 3 (Millenia).

3.5.2. Power line requirements


The following table defines the power line requirements for the generators.

NOTE: THE FOLLOWING TABLE CONTAINS RECOMMENDED VALUES FOR THE


WIRE SIZES BETWEEN THE MAINS DISCONNECT AND THE GENERATOR.
THE ACTUAL VALUES USED AT AN INSTALLATION ARE DEPENDENT ON
THE QUALITY OF THE INPUT LINE (VOLTAGE LEVEL) THE CURRENT
REQUIREMENTS AND THE LENGTH OF THE CABLE RUN AND MUST BE
CONFIRMED BY THE INSTALLER.

FINAL SELECTION OF GENERATOR INPUT WIRE AND DISCONNECTS AS


WELL AS THE CABLING FROM THE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER TO THE
MAINS DISCONNECT, MUST MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LOCAL
ELECTRICAL CODES AND IS USUALLY DETERMINED BY
HOSPITAL/CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING.

ALL THE RATINGS LISTED CONSIDER THE GENERATOR REQUIREMENTS


ONLY. THE INSTALLER MUST MAKE THE NECESSARY COMPENSATION FOR
ADDITIONAL LOAD REQUIREMENTS.

A POOR QUALITY INPUT LINE MAY RESULT IN THE INSTALLER


HAVING TO DERATE THE GENERATOR'S MAXIMUM POWER.

Minimum Minimum
Minimum
Recommended Generator Recommended Apparent
Mains Recommended Ground Wire
Mains Disconnect Momentary Distribution Mains
Voltage Generator Size
to Generator Line Current Transformer Resistance
Service Rating
15 ft/5 m max) Rating
65 kW 3∅ Generator
400 VAC #6 (15 mm2) 125 A 100 A 85 kVA #4 (25mm2) 0.13 Ω
480 VAC #6 (15 mm2) 105 A 100 A 85 kVA #4 (25mm2) 0.19 Ω
80 kW 3∅ Generator
400 VAC #6 (15 mm2) 155 A 100 A 105 kVA #4 (25mm2) 0.11 Ω
480 VAC #6 (15 mm2) 130 A 100 A 105 kVA #4 (25mm2) 0.15 Ω

All wiring and grounding should be in compliance with the national electrical code or equivalent.
All wiring must be copper.
For all installations, a separate copper ground cable #4 AWG (25 mm2) is required from the
building distribution ground to the ground terminal located inside the main disconnect switch fuse
block.
The disconnect switch shall be located within reach of the operator.

Page 34 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS

3.5.3. Generator environmental specifications

OPERATING
Ambient temperature range: 10 to 40 °C.
Relative humidity: 30% to 75%.
Atmospheric pressure range: 500 to 1060 hPa (375 to 795 mm Hg).

TRANSPORT AND STORAGE


Ambient temperature range: -20 to 70 °C.
Relative humidity: 10% to 95%, including condensation.
Atmospheric pressure range: 500 to 1060 hPa (375 to 795 mm Hg).

3.6. Console

See components information: CPI Touch Screen, monitors, Positioner console.

October 2009 Page 35


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS

3.6.1. Touch screen power requirements and environmental specifications


Touch screen is powered by means of the generator room interface board

Rated voltage: 24 VDC (CPU Board)


Mains frequency: DC

See generator environmental specifications.

3.6.2. Monitor power requirements and environmental specifications

Rated voltage: 100 ÷ 240 VAC


Mains frequency: 50 / 60 Hz
Current absorption: 1.5A rms @ 100Vac,
0.75A rms @ 240Vac
Normal operation power consumption: 55 W (Max.)

OPERATING
Ambient temperature range: 10 to 40 °C.
Relative humidity: 30% to 75% no condensation
Atmospheric pressure range: 500 hPa to 1060 hPa

TRANSPORT AND STORAGE


Ambient temperature range: -10 to 60 °C.
Relative humidity: 10% to 95% no condensation
Atmospheric pressure range: 500 hPa to 1060 hPa

monitor weight approx. 6.2 kg


flat panel dimensions 415 x 340 x 83 mm (W x H x D)

Page 36 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS

3.6.3. B&W monitor power requirements and environmental specifications

Rated voltage: 100 ÷ 240 VAC


Mains frequency: 50 Hz
Current absorption: 450 / 250 mA
Normal operation power consumption: 50 W (approx.)

OPERATING
Ambient temperature range: 0 to 40 °C.
Relative humidity: 10% to 80% no condensation
Atmospheric pressure range: 670 hPa to 1060 hPa

TRANSPORT AND STORAGE


Ambient temperature range: -20 to 60 °C.
Relative humidity: 5% to 85% no condensation
Atmospheric pressure range: 550 hPa to 1060 hPa

Totoku monitor weight approx. 4 kg


Totoku flat panel dimensions 30,2 x 36,7 x 6 cm (W x H x D)

3.6.4. Positioner console


Positioner console is powered by means of the positioner cabinet transformer 22TR2 pins 27-28.

Rated voltage: 19 VAC


Mains frequency: 50 / 60 Hz

See Positioner environmental specifications.

October 2009 Page 37


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 EQUIPMENTS DATA AND CHARACTERISTICS

3.7. Digital system

3.7.1. Digital system power requirements


Digital PC is powered by means of the isolation transformer (see positioner cabinet).
Isolation transformer rated voltage input: from 120 to 230 VAC (1kVA).

Digital PC rated voltage: 120 Vac


Allowed mains fluctuations: ±10%
Mains frequency: 50/60Hz ±0.5 Hz
Current absorption: 8A

NOTES: Power must be from a dedicated A.C. line and be free of noise, spikes, surges, and
brownouts, which exceed the nominal voltage by +10%. If these conditions cannot be met, the
optional Power Conditioner is required.

3.7.2. Digital system environmental specifications

OPERATING
Ambient temperature range: 18 to 30 °C.
Relative humidity: 20% to 80%, no condensation
Atmospheric pressure range: 0 to 3000 m (≈650 to 1020 hPa)

TRANSPORT AND STORAGE


Ambient temperature range: -40 to 60 °C.
Relative humidity: 10% to 80%, no condensation.
Atmospheric pressure range: 0 to 12000 m (≈190 to 1020 hPa)

Page 38 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4. Ceiling stand installation


4.1. General information

READ THIS MANUAL CAREFULLY in order to learn how to operate and service this equipment
correctly and to avoid personal injury or unit damage. This manual and the safety labels on the
equipment may also be available in other languages (for information contact the manufacturer).
The complete documentation which is shipped with the unit, and this manual in particular, must be
carefully preserved for future references or necessities.
MEASURES in this manual are exclusively expressed in the metric system.
THE EQUIPMENT RIGHT AND LEFT SIDES are established by the user, facing the unit (as shown
in this manual cover).
THIS UNIT IS DESIGNED to be exclusively used during the normal X-Ray operations as pointed out
as INTENDED USE. Use in any other way is considered as contrary to the intended use.
The manufacturer declines all responsibility for damage or injury caused by a use which differs from
the intended use; the user is the only responsible party of these consequences. The careful observance
of the functioning, maintenance and repair instructions, which are pointed out by the manufacturer, are
also an essential part of the equipment use.
THE RADIOGRAPHIC STAND, object of this manual, MUST BE USED, OVERHAULED AND
REPAIRED EXCLUSIVELY BY PERSONNEL that is qualified and familiar with all its
characteristics and acquainted with the relevant safety rules (accident prevention). Laws regarding
accident prevention and all industrial safety rules must always be observed.
The manufacturer is not responsible for damages or injury caused by any arbitrary modification carried
out on this unit.

4.1.1. Documentation rights


This instruction manual, including technical drawings, tables and photos, are a manufacturer’s freehold
property. For this reason, the documentation can not be disclosed, photocopied or partially reproduced
without our written consent; it can be used only by mounting, controlling and care personnel.

October 2009 Page 39


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4.1.2. Tests
The equipment testing has been performed by the manufacturer with procedures that are to verify that
the equipment, subject of this manual, is without faults and that its working features comply to the
ones foreseen for this type of use.
This kind of test is exclusively carried out by qualified personnel and its result is specified on the
inspection report. The manufacturer keeps, in conformity with law, the only report copy every unit has.

4.1.3. Guarantee
Guarantees are supplied only in accordance with the contract conditions.
Damages which are caused by incorrect equipment use or by non-observance of the rules in this
manual will not be considered under guarantee.

ATTENTION! The guarantee is automatically voided if interventions on the unit are made by non-
authorized personnel.

4.1.4. Product identification.


If it is necessary to contact the manufacturer for technical or maintenance problems, take note of the
unit serial number and overhaul in order to make the technicians intervention quicker and more
accurate. This information can be easily obtained from the Product Identification Label (PIL) that is
applied to the equipment and positioned as shown in the drawing of the next page).

4.1.5. Labels
On the unit there must be:
• part number label;
• wire ropes replacement label;
• serial number label;
• Warning and/or danger labels

Their shape and placement is shown in the drawings on the following pages.

Do not remove the adhesive labels on the unit: they are an integral part of the instructions and of the
documentation that accompany the equipment

4.1.6. CE conformity
The equipment subject of this manual, is built craftsman like and in conformity with the EN 60 601
safety regulations for the electromedical equipment. The equipment complies with the European
Directive 93/42 relating the medical devices of class 1 (annex VII).
The CE mark is shown on the adhesive label that identifies the equipment.

The Declaration of Conformity is supplied with the documents that come with the equipment. A copy
of this Declaration of Conformity can be asked for from the manufacturer.

Page 40 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4.1.6.1. Tag replacement


In case of installation in one of the following countries:

France
Germany
Spain
Hungary
Poland
Portugal
Romania
Russia
Turkey
Holland
Slovakia

it is necessary to replace the safety labels as shown in PET23GE01 drawing (following page) with the
ones included in the product documentation.
The labels are attached on three sheets, that is to say one for each type of safety label: each sheet
includes the different translations for the countries listed above.
Proceed to select the applicable language making reference to the code marked in the following image
and to select the label to be applied based on the spoken language in the installation country.

TAG TAG CODE


101604-EN

101614-EN

101594-EN

October 2009 Page 41


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Page 42 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4.2. Safety measures


4.2.1. Safety measures for the functioning

All units are manufactured following the latest technical standards in safety matters. In any case,
their use can be dangerous, if they are not correctly used by untrained personnel or if they work
differently from the projected aims.

In particular, refer to the Operator Manual to know the safety measures for the equipment operations.
• Instructions and rule which regard this kind of equipment and are in force in a country must
be respected by the operator and the installer.
• The unit must work only in rooms, which are used for medical aims (refer to regulations in
force).
• The unit is not planned to be used in rooms which are explosions risk.

The equipment can be used and subjected to maintenance operations only by authorized and trained
personnel. In particular, they must know the possible dangers coming from a wrong equipment use
and the residuals risk.

In order to avoid major risks to patients and operators and/or possible structural failure, AVOID
ANY MODIFICATIONS on the equipment with the purpose to increase its travels, performances
and/or load capacity.
Refer to the drawings and to the technical features, written in this manual, to be aware of the
performances and the maximum loads that can be supported.

4.2.2. Safety measure for maintenance


Before starting the maintenance operations, read carefully the procedure to follow. Keep clean and
dry the working area.

• All operations to do on the unit must be carried out when it does not work. The person who is
responsible of the maintenance must completely disconnect the unit, before the adjustment or
replacement of an equipment part.
• Keep hands, feet, dresses, jewels and hair at safety distance from any moving part in order to
avoid their getting caught.
• Keep all parts in good condition and correctly installed. Repair immediately damages,
replacing the consumed and broken parts.

Do not change any part of the unit; changes which are not authorized can compromise the equipment
functioning and safety. They void the manufacturer’s guarantee as well.
In particular, it is not possible to make inoperative or replace devices and/or circuits which permit
the radiations emission in accordance with the safety laws.

• After the maintenance, it is necessary to check the correct mounting and functioning of all
electrical and mechanical devices before make the unit operative again.

The operator’s absolute attention is a safety essential element.

October 2009 Page 43


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION
4.2.3. Precaution in using the equipment

The unit mobile parts movement must be carefully done in order to avoid collision risks and / or
damages to people in the examination room or to the unit functional integrity.

When the motorized vertical movement is used, it is necessary to avoid to create situations of conflict
of the telescope mobile parts against any obstacle and not to insist on the controls when the end of
travels have been reached.

In order to avoid major risks for patient sand/or damages to the equipment, the movements must be
effected using exclusively the proper control devices, make sure to stop the movements before
releasing the grip.

The unit can not be subjected to damaging stresses, such as the violent stop of the mobile parts on the
end of travel bumpers, the excessive torsion of the electrical function cables, the forced movements of
the unit without releasing the brakes, etc.

WARNING! All patients parts which are at risk of radiation exposure, must always be protected by
additional shielding devices according to the radiation safety law.

4.3. Equipment description


This manual describes the ceiling suspension features and gives the necessary instructions for its
correct use.
4.3.1. Intended use
The unit is an aerial suspension designed for a radiogenic unit (X-Ray tube and collimator) supporting
and moving.
4.3.2. Equipment parts
The ceiling stand is composed by the following parts:
1) longitudinal rails;
2) transversal bridge;
3) carriage and telescopic stand;
4) horizontal support arm for the radiogenic unit;
5) control box.

On the following pages, schematics of the equipment parts can be found.

4.3.2.1. Longitudinal rails


The longitudinal rails are made of extruded aluminium section; they are attached to the radiology room
ceiling (different mounting solutions are possible).
Channels go along all rails entire length; they have the following functions:
• they guarantee the rails adaptability to different mounting systems: upper CSA012, or
standard Unistrut CSA027;
• they make the rails assembly easier and permit more freedom during the mounting (in option
solutions with different length rails are available);
• they hold the steel guides for the ball bearings;

Page 44 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION
• they permit the positioning of one or more alignment position indicators of the radiant beam
with one or more receptors which are in the radiological room.
The rails are supplied with two painted heads: they have holes for the attaching to rails whose standard
center distance is 1650 mm long.

Contact the manufacturer in order to use alternative mounting systems or for different dimensional
needs.

4.3.2.2. Transversal bridge


The transversal bridge slides on the longitudinal rails; it is composed by a couple of rails, of the same
kind of the longitudinal ones, connected to each other. The carriage with the telescopic stand moves
inside this bridge.
In the bridge channels, the brakes and the position mechanical detent are mounted.

4.3.2.3. Telescopic carriage and stand


The telescopic elements of the stand are made of extruded aluminium and are connected to each other
through stainless steel ropes which guide their movement in an precise way (synchro ropes).
The end of the telescopic stand is hung by a steel drive rope; this winds round a drum which some
motor springs are connected to. The springs contrast the weight of the stand and of the radiogenic unit.
The main rope is placed side by side to a safety rope which avoids any kind of danger or injury for
operators or patients in case of a main cable breakage: a safety device becomes immediately operative
blocking the telescope extension movement.

The breaking of the main rope is the consequence of missed periodical checks and maintenance; the
telescopic stand, being suspended to the ceiling, requires very careful maintenance of the suspended
parts in order to avoid potential dangers for the operators and to assure the correct functioning of
the equipment itself.

Never use the ceiling stand after the safety device intervention.
DO NOT TRY TO FORCE THE X-RAY TUBE TOWARDS THE BOTTOM WHEN THE MAIN
ROPE IS BROKEN.
Immediately contact technical assistance and replace the broken rope.

On the carriage, which is made of a rigidly bolted heavy steel plate, the motor springs for the units
balancing are mounted; it is possible to hold one or more reserve springs as well. Its innovative
conception optimizes all available space and permits to hold up to 10 springs, in contrast to the 7 or 8
which are generally used, guaranteeing a maximum balanceable weight of 75 kg.
The telescope has a light weight and is not susceptible to corrosion; it guarantees at the same time the
required mechanical strength and durability.
Moreover, the light weight makes all aerial structures lighter; these are mechanically less stressed and
requires limited maintenance.

4.3.2.4. X-Ray system arm of support


The horizontal arm, that supports the X-ray system, is fastened to the lower end of the telescope and
can rotate around the vertical and the horizontal axis. The rotation movements on both the axis are
mechanically evidenced by detents (every 90°).
For the linear movements, electromagnetic brakes are used while, for the rotation movements, brake at
permanent magnet are used. These assure the braking action even in case of sudden lack of current.

October 2009 Page 45


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION
4.3.2.5. Control box
The control box, allows to concentrate in little space all the controls for the complete management of
the stand movements. Besides, the use of different colours, make the comprehension of the operations
for the moving on the three main axis easy.
On the controls there is a wide LCD display for the reading of the operational parameters.

4.3.2.6. Equipment schematic

Picture 1 - Equipment schematic

Page 46 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Pos. Description Quantity


1 LONGITUDINAL RAILS 2
2 CARRIAGE COVER (main part) 1
CARRIAGE COVER (small part) 1*
CARRIAGE COVER (small part) 1**
3 TELESCOPE 1
4 TRANSVERSAL BRIDGE 1
5 X-Ray TUBE COVER 1
6 HORIZONTAL ARM 1
7 PUSHBUTTON “GE” 1
8 X-Ray TUBE -
9 COLLIMATOR -

*For manual collimator version only


**For automatic collimator version only

4.3.3. Technical features


Longitudinal rails
• Length 440 cm
Transversal bridge
• Rail length 300 cm
• Travel of transversal bridge on the longitudinal rails 350 cm
• Kind of movement / braking manual / electromagnetic
• Mechanical position indicator equipped 1
Carriage
• Carriage travel on transversal bridge 218 cm
• Kind of movement / braking manual / electromagnetic
Telescopic stand
• Number of elements that compose the telescope 4 in aluminium extruded profile
• Vertical travel 150 cm
• Kind of movement manual
• Kind of balancing by springs and counterweights
• Braking electrical with permanent magnet
Tube arm support
• Angle of rotation around the telescope vertical axis +200° -135° or +140° -205°
• Angular positions every 90°
• Angle of rotation around the horizontal axis +120° -200° or +210° -110°
Angular positions mechanically detected every 90°
Braking of rotation movements electrical with permanent magnet
Front tube control box
• Grips for movements covered in synthetic rubber
• Push buttons to unlock the brakes in ergonomic position
• Focus to film distance and incidence values indicator LCD 1x20 characters
Powering
• Voltage / frequency 230 (220/240) Vac 50/60Hz
350 VA (lamp of diaphragm of 150
• Max. absorbed power
W max included)

October 2009 Page 47


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION
Colours
• Painted parts RAL 9002
• Adhesive membrane gray
Weights
• Rails 45 kg (each)
• Transversal bridge 85 kg
• Carriage plastic cover box 15 kg
• Stand (complete with accessories box) 145 kg
Equipment identification (according to EN 60 601)
• Classification class I type B
• Typology of installation permanently connected
• Operation mode continuous with intermittent load
Standard compliance
• Safety EN 60 601
Transport and stock environment
• Temperature range 0 °C ÷ 50 °C
• Relative humidity range (without condensation) 10 % ÷ 90 %
• Atmospheric pressure range 50 kPa ÷ 110 kPa
Operative environment
• Temperature range 10 °C ÷ 40 °C
• Relative humidity range 30 % ÷ 75 %
• Atmospheric pressure range 70 kPa ÷ 110 kPa

4.3.4. Accessories standardly supplied


Set of 14 rail fixing screws CSA012
Set of 14 rail fixing screws and bracket – Unistrut h45 - standard CSA027
Kit of 1 micro-switch on the longitudinal movement (complete of micro, support and
CSA007-A*
cable)
Kit of 1 micro-switch on the lateral movement (complete of micro, support and cable) CSA021
Kit of 4 micro-switch on the longitudinal movement (complete of micro, support,
CSA028-A**
cable and centering cams)

*For manual collimator version only


**For automatic collimator version only

4.3.5. Tools supplied for the installation


Lift device for the assemble / disassemble of the carriage telescope to/from the
CSA011-A
transversal bridge

Contact the manufacturer to inquire about the availability of other accessories (not included in the
chart) and/or to ask for specific solutions.

Page 48 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

October 2009 Page 49


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Page 50 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4.4. Lifting device


4.4.1. Safety measures for installation
Before starting the lifting and installing operations, carefully read the indications on safety contained
in par. 0 of this manual.

Safety measures for installation

To use the lifting device, place the metal pallet that the telescope is mounted to under the bridge, then
continue with the following procedures:
1) Remove the carriage rear ball bearing supports (93CSC3 – dis. Mi930031-b – Pos. 3);
2) Remove the front ball bearing supports from the carriage, right (93CSC1 - dis. Mi930031-b –
Pos. 2) and left (93CSC2 - dis. Mi930031-b – Pos. 1);
3) Place the lifting bar under the bridge and fasten it by the two screws that are part of the supply
(TCCE M8x12 - dis. MI930030-B – Pos. 7) to the proper holes made in the carriage
shoulders;
4) Remove the closure head of the bridge dis. Mi930031-b – Pos. 4);
5) Insert in the bridge rails the carriage supports previously disassembled, paying attention to the
right insertion direction;
6) Insert the two threaded tie rods (dis. MI930030-B – Pos. 9) in the bridge rails and lock them
in position by the nuts and the screws that are part of the supply (dis. MI930030-B – Pos. 1,
2, 3, 4, 5);
7) Insert the other end of the tie rods (dis. MI930030-B – Pos. 9) inside the proper holes that are
on the lifting bar device (dis. MI930030-B – Pos. 12);
8) Using the two knobs (that are to be screwed from the bottom on the threaded tie rods – dis.
MI930030-B – Pos. 14), lift the carriage up to the bridge height by alternatively acting on the
two knobs;
9) Once the right point is reached, fasten the carriage ball bearing supports to the carriage again
and then proceed with completion of the system installation.

WARNING!!!
Before removing the lifting device, check that the support bearings are correctly inserted, in the
guides fastened to the rails, and that they are properly fastened to the carriage. This safety check is
very important to avoid potential risks to patients and technical staff that may result from carriage
support failure

October 2009 Page 51


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION
Index of the picture, following page (mi930030-b).

Pos. Description Code Quantity


01 SCREW TE M10X50 170-10050 4
02 HEX. NUT M10 200-00010 12
03 FLAT WASHER D10 220-00010 4
04 NUT FOR CEILSTAND LATERAL FASTENING 100554 4
05 RAIL FASTENING CSA114-23-A 2
06 HEX. NUT M14 200-00014 6
07 SCREW TCCE M8X12 100-08012 2
08 PALLET FRAME FOR TRANSPORT 93C024 1
09 THREADED BAR CSA114-21 2
10 BEARING BLOCK CSA114-26 2
11 LIFTING COUPLING CSA114-25 2
12 LIFTING CROSSPIECE CSA113-22 1
13 SCREW TCCE M6X12 100-06012 4
14 LIFTING HANDLE CSA114-27 2
15 FASTENING SQUARE CSA114-28 2
16 SCREW TE M5X16 171-05016 4
17 FLAT WASHER WIDTH D5 222-00005 4

Index of the picture, following page (mi930031-b).


Pos. Description Code Quantity
01 FRONT LEFT BEARING SUPPORT 93CSC2 1
02 FRONT RIGHT BEARING SUPPORT 93CSC1 1
03 REAR BEARING SUPPORT 93CSC3 1
04 TRANSVERSAL BRIDGE - -
05 LONGITUDINAL RAILS - -

Page 52 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Title: LIFTING DEVICE Cod CSA011-A File: mi930030-b

October 2009 Page 53


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION – Lifting device Code CSA011-A mi930031-b

Page 54 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4.5. Installation
Before using the equipment, the operators should read the par no. 0 about the SAFETY MEASURES.

The equipment must be installed and can be maintained only by authorized and trained personnel.
Specifically, they must be informed about the possible dangers caused by improper equipment use
and the residual risks.

ATTENTION!!!
The installation of hanging units or pars can be very dangerous; only the necessary personnel for the
installation must be in the room during this operation. All other people must be sent out.

• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility in case of faulty unit operation which can be
caused by negligence or elusion of the basic maintenance rules listed below.
• All ordinary or extraordinary operations on the equipment must be registered, documented
and the information contained must be readily findable.

Maintenance and documentation duties must be observed; anything contrary to the case, the
equipment manufacturer responsibilities cease automatically.

In order to avoid major risks for patients and operators and/or dangerous structural limitations,
AVOID ABSOLUTELY modifications on the equipment with the purpose to increase its travels,
performances and/or loads.
Refer to the drawings and to the technical features, written in this manual, to be aware of the
performances and the maximum loads that can be supported.

4.5.1. Room preparation


This chapter gives useful information to prepare the room where the unit, object of this manual, will be
installed.
According to the room dimensions, these information must be observed in order to obtain the unit
complete performance in the best room fitness. Specific information about this are generally given
separately by the manufacturer or the installer, who are in any case at full disposal for any further
needs.

ATTENTION!!! All masonry works for the room preparation are at customers or installers expense.
It is important to know exactly the room features where the unit will be installed in order to make a
correct preparation, according to the required safety rules as well.

October 2009 Page 55


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4.5.2. Necessary tools for the installation


The equipment mounting does not need specials tools, but common use ones, like those listed below:
• set of fixed wrenches;
• set of box wrenches;
• set of Allen wrenches;
• set of screwdrivers;
• water level;
• electric drilling machine with a set of Vidiam drills;
• lifting device (if available).

4.5.3. Equipment warehousing and moving conditions


Once the unit is assembled in the factory, it is subjected to careful controls and tests by trained
personnel. After the cleaning, the equipment is packed with corrugated card-board and wrapping paper
(pluriball).
For international shipment, or upon customer’s request, the equipment is crated in one or more wooden
cases.

Before the installation, the unit can be kept in the warehouse for some time with its original
packaging. In any case, although every metal part is carefully covered by protection paint or
oxidation superficial treatment, the equipment is not planned to work or be stocked outdoor. It cannot
withstand the humidity; for this reason, do not keep it outdoor or in extreme environment conditions.

It is absolutely forbidden to pass by or under the load during the lifting operations.

Make sure the cases are well fixed during the transport to avoid blows which could damage their
contents.

Pay attention to the moving hanging loads in order to avoid dangers to people or other things.

The wooden cases are made to be lifted through a lifting device (forklift truck). If they must be lifted
from the top (crane), it is necessary to sling them through suitable ropes, which must twine round the
case.

4.5.4. Equipment receiving


The equipment is contained in two cases, whose content is briefly listed below. The exact cases
content is specified in the Packing List which is attached on the case.

Refer to the instructions outside the cases for their moving and lifting.

The CASE No. 1, whose dimensions are 460x95x55 cm (gross weight, about 260 kg), contains:
• the complete longitudinal rails and the screws sets for the rails fixing to the support structures;
• the complete transversal bridge;
• lift device (if available)
• the cables rail (to be placed externally to one of the longitudinal rail);
• the box with the cables hoses; the large carriage cover (in two parts) and the X-Ray tube
cover.

Page 56 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

The CASE No. 2, whose dimensions are 100x75x140 cm (gross weight, about 230 kg), contains:
• the telescopic stand mounted on a disposable metal structure;
• the collimator (if supplied);
• a cardboard box, which contains the control board, the accessories and the finishing parts of
the telescopic stand.

The metal structure makes easier not only the stand moving on the ground through a carriage, but also
its lifting and inserting on the sliding rails of the transversal frame. This operation is much easier if the
proper device (which is supplied on demand) is used for the stand lifting.

Index contains of the ceiling suspension case (picture 2 on the following page).

Pos. Description Quantity


1 CASE NUMBER 1 COVER -
2 CASE NUMBER 1 - PACKING LIST -
HOSE FROM THE CARRIAGE TO THE RACK L=6900 1
3
HOSE FROM THE X-Ray TUBE TO THE CARRIAGE L=3100 1
CARRIAGE COVER (main part) 1
4 CARRIAGE COVER (small part) 1*
CARRIAGE COVER (small part) 1**
5 X-Ray TUBE COVER 1
6 COVER AND CABLES BOX 1
7 CABLES RAIL L=4000 1
8 TRANSVERSAL BRIDGE L=3000 1
SET OF 14 RAIL FIXING SCREWS (STANDARD)
1
9 SET OF 14 RAIL FIXING SCREWS AND BRACKETS – UNISTRUT H45
1
(option)
10 LONGITUDINAL RAILS L=4400 2
11 CASE NUMBER 1 1

Pos. Description Quantity


12 CASE NUMBER 2 COVER -
13 MANUALS AND DOCUMENTS -
14 CASE NUMBER 2 -
15 CASE NUMBER 2 – PACKING LIST -
16 STAND ON THE PALLET 1
17 ACCESSORIES BOX 1
18 COLLIMATOR (OPTION) -
19 CASE NUMBER 2 LATERAL WALL -

*For manual collimator version only


**For automatic collimator version only

October 2009 Page 57


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Picture 2 - Contains of ceiling suspension cases

Page 58 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Picture 3 - Contains of box accessories (16.2)

Pos. Description Quantity


01 ON RAILS SLIDING HOSE SUPPORT 3
ON CARRIAGE RIGHT HOSE SUPPORT 1
02
ON CARRIAGE LEFT HOSE SUPPORT 1
03 TUBE SIDE HOSE SUPPORT 1
04 CONNECTING CABLE FOR COLLIMATOR 1
CONNECTING CABLE FOR MICROSWITCH 1*
05
CONNECTING CABLE FOR MICROSWITCH 1**
06 BIPOLAR CABLE FOR LONGITUDINAL BRAKES 1
07 CONNECTING CABLE FOR COLLIMATOR L=6 M 1
08 PUSHBUTTON CONNECTION CABLE 1
09 PUSHBUTTON “GE” 1
10 CAM 2
ARM COVER (2 HALVES) 1
11
ARM COVER FIXING SCREW TB INOX M3X6 8
12 DETENT (LATERAL MOVEMENT CARRIAGE) 1
13 ELECTROMAGNETIC BRAKE (LATERAL MOVEMENT) 1
14 CARRIAGE COVER FIXING PLATE 1
15 RIGHT BRACKET 1

October 2009 Page 59


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION
ON TELESCOPE HOSE SUPPORT 1
16
SCREW TBO CE M4X12 3
17 CARRIAGE COVER FIXING SCREW TBO TACA M5X12 3
18 PAINT RAL9002 1
19 ON BRIDGE HOSE SUPPORT 1
20 ADESIVE TAPE - GREEN (5 MT) 1
21 ADESIVE TAPE - BLUE (3.5 MT) 1
22 COUNTERWEIGHT PLATES 2 set
23 ADDITIONAL COUNTERWEIGHT 1
24 SCREW TCCE 5x30 2

*For manual collimator version only


**For automatic collimator version only

Picture 3B – Contains of accessories box (Micro switches kits)

Page 60 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4.5.5. Rails mounting


The building works for the rails and the ceiling stand fixing are at customers or installers expense.

ATTENTION
The static load which acts on each screw in the vertical direction is equal to 2000 N, while the stress
in the horizontal direction is of about 150 N for each screw.
For mounting methods which differ from the suggested ones, or for heavier suspensions, this value
could be higher or lower.
The supporting surfaces of the longitudinal rails props must be parallel and carefully levelled (± 2
mm on the length). Possible minimum differences can be corrected during the mounting phase,
putting the suitable thickness between the rails and the supporting surfaces.

The more common fixing methods of the rails to the ceiling are listed below.

ATTENTION!!!
The measuring of the ceiling stand support structures is exclusively under the competence of the
designer who is responsible of the rooms preparation. Kind and dimension of the I-beams are shown
in our drawings just as an indication.

October 2009 Page 61


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Page 62 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

October 2009 Page 63


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION
Cod. CSA027 (optional)

Page 64 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4.6. Mounting
4.6.1. Equipment mounting

In order to avoid major risks to patients and operators and/or possible structural failure, AVOID
ANY MODIFICATIONS on the equipment with the purpose to increase its travels, performances
and/or load capacity.
Refer to the drawings and to the technical features, written in this manual, to be aware of the
performances and the maximum loads that can be supported.

4.6.1.1. Longitudinal rails mounting


The equipment mounting begins fixing the rails to I-beams or support elements, which are arranged
following the documentation instructions (mounting systems and equipment plan view). The
documentation explained in the previous chapter is given to the room preparer.
In that case, there are the longitudinal rails and the transversal frame with fixing screws and nuts. Open
the case (removing only the cover 01.2), take out the transversal bridge (08.2) and the longitudinal
rails (10.2).
The rails are fixed to the I-beams through a set of screws and washers and the special square nuts,
which are located outside the rails package.

It is important to check the rails parallelism to each other and horizontally; If needed, shim where
necessary.
Moreover, check, using a meter, that the rails are parallel because an incorrect mount could
compromise the correct sliding of the transversal bridge.

4.6.1.2. Transversal rails mounting


Look at the picture on the following page for the inserting method of the transversal frame inside the
longitudinal rails.
The transversal frame can be inserted into one of the longitudinal rails ends. If the fixing points and the
parallelism are the projected ones, this operation can be easily done.
• Disassemble the longitudinal rails heads (7.4) and the end of travel bumper (6.4);
• Lift the bridge (2.4) (manually or using some ropes) and guide it in the longitudinal rails
(1.4);
• Once the insertion is finished, mount the end of travel bumpers of the transversal bridge
translation movement (6.4) in the suitable longitudinal rails channels, and fix them in the
desired position to have the required travel;
• At last mount the rail heads on the longitudinal rails ends (7.4).

October 2009 Page 65


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Picture 4 - Transversal bridge mounting

Pos. Description Quantity


01 LONGITUDINAL RAILS 2
02 TRANSVERSAL BRIDGE 1
03 RIGHT BEARING SUPPORT 2
04 GUIDE BRIDGE TIE 1
05 LEFT BEARING SUPPORT 2
06 BUMPERS 2
07 RAIL HEAD 2

To reduce the exercise backlash of the stand, it is advised to mount the bridge so that its guide
bearing (i.e. the ones with vertical axis) will be where the stand telescope will be mounted.

Page 66 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION
If the distance between the longitudinal rails heads and the room walls does not permit the above
mentioned operation, the bridge must be inserted between the longitudinal rails, reducing the distance
between the two crossbars.
Do as follows:
1) loosen the screws which lock one of the transversal bridge tie (4.4);
2) bring the loosened tie near the other, so that it is possible the inserting on the longitudinal rails
(1.4);
3) lift the bridge (2.4) at the longitudinal rails height (1.4);
4) restore the original distance between the transversal bridge tie (4.4), in order to permit the
supporting bearings to enter perfectly the longitudinal rails sliding channel (the correct
position is marked on the bridge during the mounting phase in the factory).

ATTENTION. To make easier the insertion the transversal bridge guiding bearings, it is better to
remove the RIGHT and LEFT BRACKETS (3.4 and 5.4) from the bridge ties (4.4) and to insert the
guiding bearing brackets from the longitudinal rails head (1.4).
When this operation is finished, it is possible to put the bearing brackets back in position.

5) Check distances and alignment of the transversal bridge in respect to the longitudinal rails,
before locking the loosened bridge tie.

ATTENTION!!!
Check that the support and sliding bearings (2.5 )are correctly inserted in the guides fastened to the
rails before removing the lifting device. This check is very important in order to avoid dangers that
might come from it for the safety of the patient and technical staff.

4.6.1.3. Transversal bridge regulations


To effect this operation it is necessary to remove the cover of the two bridge cross bars (8.5).

It is possible to immediately regulate the bearings backlash or postpone this operation when
mounting is over.

To regulate the bearings tightening, use an Allen wrench and act only on the contrast bearing (the one
placed under the rail) to move the eccentric one on which the bearings are mounted (3.5).

ATTENTION. Check that the contrast bearings are not closed against the guides and the bridge
slides along the rails correctly and freely from frictions. In contrary case, correct the bearings
adjustment (3.5).

Therefore, regulate the distance of the brakes by acting on the fastening screws (4.5) and leaving a
distance of 0,8 – 1 mm between the brake and the steel plate fastened to the rail.

When the operation is over, mount again the covers of the bridge cross bars (8.5) and, in
correspondence of the cover with the opening in the central door, mount the support plate of the
optional micros (11.5). This plate is sent dismounted in the accessories box (17.2), to avoid damages
during the transport.

October 2009 Page 67


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION
Index of picture 5.

Pos. Description Quantity


01 GUIDE BRIDGE TIE 1
02 SUPPORT BEARING 2
03 CONTRAST BEARING 2
SCREW TCCE M5x12 2
04 WASHER D5 4
SPRING WASHER D5 2
05 LONGITUDINAL BRAKE 2
SCREW TCCE M5x12 2
06 WASHER D5 2
SPRING WASHER D5 2
07 DETENT 1
08 TIE COVER 1
09 SCREW TCB INOX M4x8 2

12 HOLE FOR THE PASSAGE OF THE CABLE -

Picture 5 - Transversal bridge regulation

Page 68 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

ATTENTION:
Check that distance between the brake and the steel plate remain constant and without interference
along all the transversal bridge travel

4.6.1.4. Accessories mounting


When the mounting of the longitudinal rails and of the bridge is over, it is advisable to immediately
complete it by mounting the accessories and the spare parts contained in the accessories box (17.2).

The centering cams for detent (10.3A) are already complete with the screws and the fastening square
nuts, and must be inserted in the lower channel of a rail of the bridge (in correspondence of the detent
mounted on the carriage of the telescopic stand) and in the lower channel of one of the longitudinal
rails (in correspondence of the detent mounted on the bridge cross bar).
Their position can be adjusted later and modified in any moment (also when mounting is over) thank
to the possibility to make the centering cams sliding along the whole rails and bridge length. The
function of the two centering cams (supplied with the standard supply) is to identify a specific work
position (for example, for the alignment with a table or with a wall bucky) or to spot a parking position
(for example if, in the same room, a remote controlled equipment must work)

If you wish to mount one or more safety micro and the respective action cams, contact the
manufacturer to receive the specific instructions and the availability of the different kits of micro.

Therefore, proceed with mounting the hose support on the bridge (19.3A) by fastening it to the bridge
upper part (as shown in picture 1). The square nuts already inserted inside the rails of the bridge, allow
to mount the support in any position and on the right or left side according to the needs.
Connect then the cable coming from the brakes of the bridge to the terminal board that is in the upper
part of the support (19.3A) together with the connecting cable of the longitudinal brakes (06.3A)
contained in the box. The connecting cable must enter in the hose support upper hole, go through the
piece of rubber sheath that takes up to the carriage and then being connected to the control electronic
board.

The cables connecting operations should be postponed when the mounting is over and following
carefully what written on the electrical schematics standardly supplied and contained in the
Technical Electrical Manual

Then mount the guide for the cables sliding (07.2) to the extern of one of the longitudinal rails placing
it (using the rail lateral groove) toward right or left so to address the cables toward the generator. This
guide can be placed on the front or rear rail (always externally to the rails) according to the installation
needs.
Then insert, inside the cables rail, the 3 sliding hose support (01.3A), after removing the safety screw
at the ends of the cables guide.

The cables and support sheaths mounting will be postponed at the end of the system installation, after
completing the mechanical parts assembling.

October 2009 Page 69


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Picture 6 - Cable rail mounting

Page 70 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION
Index of picture 6 in the previous page
Pos. Description Quantity
A CABLE RAIL (omega fixing) 1*
B CABLE RAIL (lateral fixing) 1**
01 CABLE RAIL 1
02 ON RAIL SLIDING HOSE SUPPORT 3
03 SQUARE NUT 20x20 M4 5
04 HEX. SCREW 4x10 5
05 CABLE RAIL SUPPORT 5
06 SCREW TC TACE 4x12 5
07 SQUARE NUT 12x12 M4 5
08 SCREW TC TACA 4x20 2
09 HEX. NUT M4 2

11 HEX. NUT 4x10 5


12 CABLE RAIL OMEGA SUPPORT 5
13 SCREW TSCE 4x12 5
14 SQUARE NUT 20x20 M4 5
15 SQUARE NUT 12x12 M4 5
16 ON RAIL SLIDING HOSE SUPPORT 3
17 SCREW TC TACA 4x20 2
18 CABLE RAIL 1
19 HEX. NUT M4 2

* Supplied only if the equipment configuration foresees the assembly of two cable
** Supplied with standard ceilstand.

The cables and support hoses mounting should be delayed to the end of the installation of equipment,
after having completed the assembly of the mechanical parts.

At the last, use the supplied colored bands (contained in the accessories box 20.3 and 21.3) to spot the
directions of the equipment moving (on this subject, see the control push buttons color that are on the
control board).
Especially the green band (14.3) spots the longitudinal direction and must be applied under the front
rail (in a position that the operator can clearly see) inside the present lowering.
The blue band (15.3) spots the lateral direction and must be applied under one of the rails of the bridge
(in a position that the operator can clearly see) inside the lowering.
The yellow band spots the vertical direction and it is already applied on the main element of the
telescopic stand.

October 2009 Page 71


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4.6.1.5. Mounting of the telescopic stand


Remove the cover and one of the short side of case number 2 (12.2 and 19.2). Take out from the case
the telescopic stand which is vertically mounted (effective working position) on a disposable metal
structure (16.2).

Before lift the stand on the rails, do as follows:


1) Remove the wrapping paper and control carefully that all parts were not damaged during the
transport;

Any kind of damage must be immediately communicated to the forwarder and the manufacturer.

2) Mount the cable support assemblies (06.9 e 07.9) on the rear side of the carriage on the
internal part of the bearing support using the bolt TCCE M10x25 already inserted in the
required position (see picture 9).

N.B. The right and left sides are recognizable from the mounting impossibility on the opposite part.

3) On the contrary, postpone the longitudinal brake mounting (03.9) and of the detent (01.9); this
operation must be done only after the stand inserting into the rails. In this way, its accidental
damaging is avoided;

When the stand is on the metal structure, it can be easily moved through a lifting truck and lifted
manually (weight ≈ 130 kg) or through a lifting device which is supplied on request.

4) Before the lifting, take out the closing crossbar on transversal bridge head (04.7) and the
bumpers (03.7);
5) Insert the stand carriage (05.7) into the transversal rails (02.7);
6) Once this operation is finished, mount again the bumpers (03.7) and the closing crossbar
(04.7).

ATTENTION:
Make sure that the end of travel bumpers and the safety closing bridge heads are correctly placed
and secured before using the equipment

ATTENTION
Before removing the lifting device, verify that the supporting and sliding bearings are correctly
inserted into the guides, which are fixed to the rails. This control is very important in order to avoid
injuries to patients or technical personnel
It is possible to immediately regulate the bearings backlash or postpone this operation when
mounting is over.

Page 72 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Picture 7 - Telescopic stand mounting

Pos. Description Quantity


01 LONGITUDINAL RAILS 2
02 TRANSVERSAL BRIDGE 1
03 BUMPER 2
04 BRIDGE HEAD 2
05 TELESCOPIC STAND 1

To regulate the bearings fastening, use an Allen wrench and act on the contrast bearing only (the one
placed under the rail) to move the eccentric one on which the bearings are mounted.

ATTENTION
Check that the bearings are not tightened against the guides and that the carriage sliding on the
bridge happens correctly and free of frictions. In contrary case correct the bearings regulation.

4.6.1.6. Use of the lifting device for the stand mounting


On demand, it is possible to have a mechanical device for the stand lifting. For its use refer to
instructions which are issued with.

October 2009 Page 73


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4.6.2. Ceiling stand mechanical preparation


Free the stand from the metal structure and complete the carriage mounting the transversal brake (03.9)
and the position detent (01.9).
To mount the X-ray unit it is necessary to extend the telescope and position the horizontal arm at about
1.5 meters from floor.

Picture 8 - Block device telescope extension

Pos. Description Quantity


01 SPRINGS DRUM 2
02 RIGHT SHOULDER 1
03 MAIN SHAFT 1
04 LOCKING SCREW TE M12 x 70 1

The balancing springs action keeps completely closed the telescope; for this reason, in order to bring
the arm at the desired height, it is necessary to extend by strength the telescope down and keep it in
position through the locking device, designed to this aim (4.8).
This device consists of a screw M12; once it is screwed in the block fixed to one of the carriage
shoulder (2.8), it enters one of the holes of the balancing springs winding drum (1.8), locking its
rotation.
At this point start the X-ray unit mounting.

Page 74 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

ATTENTION!!!
Follow the above described instructions to lock the rotation of the springs winding drum. Do not use
foreign matters or other systems which could be dangerous for the assembler’s safety.

Index of picture 9 in the following page


Pos. Description Quantity
01 LATERAL DETENT 1
SCREW TCCE 5x10 2
02 SPRING WASHER D5 2
WASHER D5 2
03 LATERAL BRAKE 1
SCREW TCCE 5x10 2
04 SPRING WASHER D5 2
WASHER D5 2
05 CARRIAGE COVER FIXING PLATE 1
06 ON CARRIAGE RIGHT HOSE SUPPORT 1
07 ON CARRIAGE LEFT HOSE SUPPORT 1
08 CARRIAGE COVER FIXING SCREW TB INOX M5X12 3
09 CARRIAGE COVER (main part) 1
CAP NUT INOX M5 4
10
WIDE FLAT WASHER D5 4
11 CARRIAGE COVER (small part) 1*
12 AUTOMATIC COLLIMATOR RACK 1**
13 CARRIAGE COVER (small part) 1**

*For manual collimator version only


**For automatic collimator version only

October 2009 Page 75


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Picture 9 - Carriage

Page 76 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Picture 10 - Horizontal arm

October 2009 Page 77


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION
Index of picture 10 in the previous page
Pos. Description Quantity
01 TELESCOPE 1
02 HORIZONTAL DETENT DISK 1
03 HORIZONTAL AXIS BRAKE 1
04 VERTICAL DETENT DISK 1
05 VERTICAL AXIS BRAKE 1
06 ARM COVER 1
07 X-Ray TUBE BRACKET 1
08 HORIZONTAL ARM 1
09 Additional COUNTERWEIGHT 1
10 SCREW TCCE 6x30 2
11 COUNTERWEIGHT PLATES 2 SET
12 SCREW TSCE 6x30 4

4.6.2.1. X-Ray tube mounting


On the stand horizontal arm, a block with four vertical holes is mounted (07.10 or 04.11).
Referring to picture no. 12, insert the 4 dowel 6x40 (03.11 or 3.12) in the X-Ray tube bracket (2.12).

Index of the picture 11 in the following page


Pos. Description Quantity
01 TUBE SIDE HOSE SUPPORT 1
DOWEL 6X40 4
03* LARGE WASHER D6 4
HEX. NUT M6 4
04 X-Ray TUBE BRACKET 1
05 PUSHBUTTON BRACKET 1
06 X-Ray TUBE -
07 PUSHBUTTON REAR COVER 1
08 SCREW TCCE 10X20 2
09 PUSHBUTTON “GE” 1
10 COLLIMATOR RING SPACERS -
11 COLLIMATOR CONE -
12 COLLIMATOR -
X-Ray TUBE COVER 1
13
SCREW TBOCE 4X10 4

* Suggested tube fastening screws (refer to the technical instructions that come with the X-Ray tube)

Page 78 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Picture 11 - Tube and collimator mounting

October 2009 Page 79


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

ATTENTION
During these operations and to avoid to damage the tube, refer to the technical instructions that come
with the it.
The instructions supplied with this manual are valid only indicatively.

Between the X-Ray tube bracket and the support must be inserted the control board support bracket
(05.11 o 4.12),
On the bracket there are two rows of holes that permit to adapt the position of the control board
support fork to the diameter of the tube bracket that is to be mounted. The holes to use are those which
allow keeping the support fork at the minimum distance from the tube.
When a Varian 130B tube is mounted, it is advisable to use the second and the fifth hole (starting to
count them from the top) that are in the control box support plate (see picture below).

Picture 12 – Varian 130B tube mounting

Pos. Description Quantity


01 X-Ray TUBE -
02 X-Ray TUBE BRACKET -
DOWEL 6X40 4
03* LARGE WASHER D6 4
HEX. NUT M6 4
04 PUSHBUTTON BRACKET 1

* Suggested tube fastening screws (refer to the technical instructions that come with the X-Ray tube)

Page 80 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4.6.2.2. Collimator flange mounting

ATTENTION
Carefully follow the mounting instructions and make sure that the collimator is correctly assembled.
Uncorrected mounting could be dangerous, it could be cause the collimator fall.
IMPORTANT NOTE: you shall check that the fixation screws used to secure the collimator are the
proper ones as follows: verify that they protrude through the flange and spacers far enough to
engage at least 6 threads (that is to say 6 mm) into the tube port face.

Accessories included with every collimator:


nr. 1 Mounting flange 18,5 mm thickness
nr. 3 Spacers for mounting flange 1,5 mm thickness

1) Determine the distance from the focal spot to the tube port face.
2) Subtract the resulting distance from 80 mm. and determine how many 1,5 mm spacers
combined with the 18,5 mm thickness of the mounting flange will be required to make up the
difference.
3) The outer face of the collimator-mounting flange must be at 80 mm. from the focal spot.,
where the allowable tolerance is ±1 mm.
4) Select four bolts of suitable thread (TSEI M6) and of such a length that they protrude through
the flange and spacers far enough to engage at least 6 threads into the tube port face.

FOCAL SPOT

18,5

October 2009 Page 81


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4.6.2.3. Collimator mounting


To make the collimator positioning easier, the X-Ray tube 180° rotation is suggested, so that the
collimator (rotated of 180° as well) (12.11) can be safely positioned on the x-ray tube (06.11). In this
way, collimator damage by an accidental drop is avoided if the fixing flange has not been correctly
tightened.
Mount the collimator support flange (11.11) on the rays window, putting the necessary number of
spacers (10.11) to respect the collimator positioning towards the rays emission cone.

ATTENTION. During these operations and to avoid to damage the collimator, refer to the technical
instructions that come with it.
The instructions supplied with this manual are valid only indicatively

4.6.2.4. Collimator rotation screw lock

Collimator rotated to left side Centred collimator Collimator rotated to the right side

The collimator has the possibility to rotate on the right and on the left. It is possible to lock the
collimator with a screw in the centre position in case the country regulatory do not allows the ±90°
collimator rotation.
The previous picture (on the right) shows the screw position to lock the collimator rotation feature.

Page 82 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4.6.2.5. Automatic collimator

200 cm

180 cm

100 cm 4

90 cm

2 3
parking
position
0 cm
example
Wall 5
Stand 1

(1) PBL Positive Beam Limitation cam;


(2) FFD 100 cm cam;
(3) FFD 180 cm cam;
(4) parking position cam example
(5) longitudinal rails

4.6.2.6. Working position identification


Upon customer’s request the kit including the micro switch and the cams for the identification of the
different stand working positions are available.

CSA021 – Kit micro lateral movement (picture 13)


It is composed of 1 micro-switch mounted on the right front bearing support (5.13), 1 cam for the
activation of the micro-switch (inserted in the lower channel of a rail of the bridge) (4.13) and no cam
(3.13) to activate the mechanical detent (it is used one of the detent cam, supplied with the standard
supply, placed in the lower channel of a rail in such a way that, at the position identified by the detent,
corresponds the activation of the lateral micro-switch).

CSA007-A – Kit micro-switch for table alignment (picture 14) – for manual collimator use only
It is composed of 1 micro-switches mounted on the transversal bridge , 1 cam for the activation of the
micro-switch (inserted in the lower channel of a rail of the bridge) (06.14) and no cam (3.13) to
activate the mechanical detent (it is used one of the detent cam, supplied with the standard supply,
placed in the lower channel of a rail in such a way that, at the position identified by the detent,
corresponds the activation of the lateral micro-switch).

CSA028-A –Kit micro-switch for table alignment (picture 15) – for automatic collimator use only
It is composed of 4 micro-switches mounted on the transversal bridge, 1 cam for the activation of the
micro-switch (inserted in the lower channel of a rail of the bridge) and no cam to activate the
mechanical detent (it is used one of the detent cam, supplied with the standard supply, placed in the
lower channel of a rail in such a way that, at the position identified by the detent, corresponds the
activation of the lateral micro-switch).

October 2009 Page 83


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

The longitudinal micro-switch kits are composed of the micro-switch support plate, by the micro-
switches and by the connection cables, already connected and tested at the factory.
Mount the micro-switch support on the top of one of the bridge aluminium rails, drive the cable on
the side of the bridge tie (1.5) and then connect the cables to the terminal board placed on the hose
support on the bridge (19.3A)
Then, mount the support plate of the micro-switches. The position and disposition are the ones shown
in picture 5.

For the connection modalities and of electrical interfacing, refer to the electrical schematics in the
OTS Section of “System Tasks and Procedures”.

Picture 13 – CSA021 – Kit to mount the 2 micro-switches on the lateral movement


(complete of micro switch and centring cams - option).

Pos. Description Quantity


1 LONGITUDINAL RAILS 2
2 TRANSVERSAL BRIDGE 1
3 POSITION DETENT 1
4* MICROSWITCH CAM 1
5* MICROSWITCH 1
MICRO SUPPORT 1
SCREW TE M6x16 2
6*
WASHER D6 2
SPRING WASHER D6 2
7 CARRIAGE 1
8 TELESCOPE 1

* Parts furnished with kit CSA021

Page 84 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Picture 14 – CSA007-A– Kit to mount the 1 micro-switches on the longitudinal movement


(complete of micro switch and centring cams – furnished with manual-type collimator only).

Pos. Description Quantity


01 LONGITUDINAL RAILS 2
02* S.I.D. MICRO SUPPORT 1
03 GUIDE TIE COVER 1
04 TRANSVERSAL BRIDGE 1
05* POSITION DETENT 1
06* MICROSWITCH CAM 1
07* MICROSWITCH 1

* Parts furnished with kit CSA007-A

October 2009 Page 85


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Picture 15 – CSA028-A

Page 86 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION
4.6.3. Electrical parts disposition
Refer to the specific technical instruction (OTS Section of “System Tasks and Procedures”) to have
information on the electrical schematics and the procedures of interconnection of the elements that
compose the equipment.

From the electric point of view the equipment is composed of the following elements:

• ceiling suspension;
• control board;
• X-Ray tube;
• collimator.

4.6.3.1. Control board mounting


The mounting of the stand interconnection and working cables starts from the control board.
Fix the control board (09.11) without its rear cover (07.11) to the support bracket (05.11), using the
two screws M10 (08.11) in supply.

Wait to make control board electrical connections until the final installation phase.

4.6.3.2. A.T. cables mounting


The 60 mm diameter plastic hoses (03.2) that contain the cables and the brackets for support (01.3A,
02.3A, 03.3A, 15.3A, 16.3A and 19.3A) are supplied with the equipment.
The hoses are cut in two pieces:
• Hose D60 L3100
• Hose D60 L6900
The first piece serves to cover the section from the X-Ray tube support to the stand carriage. The
second piece covers the section that goes from the carriage to the generator (or to the wall hose
support). Besides the standard hose supports supplied for the cables, it is possible to request from the
manufacturer the kit to fasten the hose to the wall (optional – see Picture 18).

Before starting to mount the cables it is advisable to choose the proper work positions to use: on the
right of the telescope (standard) or on the left (by using the left hose support arm supplied with the
equipment, the support can be detached from the right bracket that is not used and then mounted on
the left one).
It’s also important to make sure in advance that the cable lengths are enough to cover the required
distance.

Assemble the function cables of the X-Ray tube (A.T., rotating anode starter, etc.) and insert them,
together with the cable coming from the control board, into the plastic hoses; to do this, follow the
course shown in the enclosed drawings.

1) First mount the cables support arm on the telescopes right side (16.3A) (or on the left, by
using the second bracket supplied with the equipment 15.3A), fixing it through screws to the
tube number 2 lower end.
2) Then, prepare the hose supports on the carriage (02.3A) and on the bridge (19.3A).
3) Insert the electrical cables into the issued plastic hose.

October 2009 Page 87


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION
4) Next, attach the other end of the hose in the support on the right side of the carriage (or on the
left side if you prefer the cables placed on the left) (07.9 or 06.9).
5) Fasten the mid support for the hose by using the support arm mounted on the telescope
(16.3A or 15.3A) (being careful to leave 1,2 meters, for the last segment of the hose which
must be attached to the tube support).

Before proceeding to the cable connections, check that the previously mounted hose does not limit in
any way the radiogenic unit mobility by bringing it towards the extreme positions of its vertical
travel.
Following the suggested instructions, there should be no problem of hose interference with the stands
foreseen movements.

A second piece of plastic hose (about 7 meters long) is supplied for the cables coming out of the
carriage.

6) Cut a piece, about 1.5 meters long, to cover the distance between the carriage (06.9 or 07.9)
and the hose support fixed to the transversal bridge.
7) Fix one end to the support on the carriage left side (07.9) (or on the right side, if the left
disposition is preferred (06.9)) and insert the cables, which do not stop inside the carriage
(A.T. cables, collimator, transversal brake), paying attention to fix the cable surplus through
the use of cable ties; these cables must be arrange so that there is no interference with the
equipment mechanical parts.
8) Insert the other end into the hose support on the transversal bridge. The cables for the brake
and micro switch controls must then pass through the hole located in the upper side of the
hose support (these cables must then be connected to the terminal board on the support upper
side).
9) Now insert the remaining piece of the white plastic hose and lock it in the support on the
transversal bridge (after having inserted all cables in it), together with the tube coming from
the carriage (19.3A). Arrange well the cables which come from the hose support and tighten
the screws, making a union inside the support.
10) Then mount the last three sliding hose supports (01.3A) and insert them in the cables rail
(07.2) applied to the longitudinal rail (10.2); insert the white plastic hose, leaving about one
meter distance between a clamp and another.
11) Cut the hose at the required length and connect all supply cables.

Connect all cables and electrical devices and check that all correctly works, before mounting the
covers.
For the correct connection sequence refer to the enclosed electrical diagrams.

The suggested arrangements of the cables are shown in the following drawings. Possible other
solutions can be studied and chosen together with the installer and / or manufacturer.

Mount the plastic cover of the X-Ray tube (13.11) and the carriage cover in two parts (09.9 and 11.9 or
13.9).

Page 88 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION
To mount the tube cover do as follow:
1) Remove the control box (09.11) from the control box attachment (05.11) by unscrewing the
screws (08.11);
2) Mount the rear cover that close the control box (07.11) having care to place and block all the
cables inside the control box and to connect all the foreseen protection earths;
3) Position the tube plastic cover (13.11), above the x-ray tube without fastening anything;
4) Re-mount the control box (09.11) to the control box attachment (05.11) by using the supplied
screws (08.11);
5) Fasten the tube plastic cover (13.11) to the control box (09.11) by using the supplied screws.

The closing of the equipment plastic covers must be performed when the assembling is over, after
balancing and connecting all what is necessary, and only after the equipment testing and verification.

To mount the carriage cover, do as follow:


1) Mount the big part of the cover (09.9) fastening it by the supplied screws (08.9 and 10.9) to
the front bearing support and to the metallic plates placed on the rear bearing supports;
2) Mount the fastening plate of the cover to the telescope (05.9) on the top of it, by using the
stop dowel and the nut already inserted in position (this step is for manual version only);
3) Mount the small part of the cover (11.9 or 13.9) fastening it by the supplied screws (08.9 and
10.9) to the fastening plate to the telescope (05.9) and to the metallic plates placed on the rear
bearing supports.

October 2009 Page 89


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Picture 16 – Disposition with the cables on the right (standard configuration)

Page 90 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4.6.3.3. Disposition of the micro-switch cables and their connection

The micro-switch longitudinal kits are composed of the micro-switch plate of support, of the micro-
switches and of the connection cables, already connected and tested at the factory. To mount them, it
is necessary to insert the cable in the milled slot (12.5) placed inside the bridge cross bar (1.5) and
then connect the cables to the terminal board placed on the hose support on the bridge (19.3A). Then,
mount the support plate of the micro-switches in correspondence of the cover of the bridge cross bar
with the opening in the central part. The position and disposition are the ones shown in picture 5.
For the connection modalities and electrical interfacing, refers to the electrical schematics in the
OTS Section of “System Tasks and Procedures”

October 2009 Page 91


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Picture 17 - Cable path

Picture 18 - On wall hose support (option)

Page 92 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Pos. Description Quantity


01 CABLES COVER 1
02 BRACKET 1
03 HOSE SUPPORT 1
04 SCREW M4x10 3
05 STAINLESS SCREW M4x6 4
06 SCREW M4x25 2

4.6.4. Stand balancing

Only after the mechanical and electrical preparation it is possible to remove the safety screw that
avoids the rotation of the drum for the springs winding. Refers to picture 8.

4.6.4.1. Balancing of the X-Ray unit rotating movement on the horizontal axis
This balancing must be done at the end of the mounting , when it is possible to unlock the permanent
electromagnetic brake of the rotating movement on the horizontal axis. It is important that all cables of
the equipment are correctly positioned as well.
Unlock the brake and rotate the X-Ray unit to verify it is balanced.
If balancing is not correct, find the barycentre by moving the X-Ray unit up and down in its support by
utilizing the regulation possibilities which are offered by numerous holes on the support (08.9).

4.6.4.2. Vertical movement balancing

In mounting of the control board and of the electrical cables, nearly the whole final weight rests on
the stand; At this time, the vertical movement can be approximately balanced (this must be perfected
in final phases of assembly).

The balancing device uses, as active elements, some motor springs and, as passive elements, some
metal counterweight plates (11.10 and 09.10) that which must be fixed on the proper spaces of the
horizontal support arm that holds the radiogenic unit (08.10).

To allow a correct closing of the cover of the horizontal arm (11.3A) mount the counterweights plates
as shown in picture 10.

In the stand standard configuration, to contrast the telescope and x-ray system weight are used 7
springs, the eighth spring is available for heavier radiogenic units.

The stand is predisposed in factory to balance:


- 42.1 kg for manual collimator version (net weight)
- 42.7 kg for automatic collimator version (net weight)
Further adjustments could be made during the installation, modifying the number of counterweight
plates which are mounted on the horizontal arm (see picture 10) and/or the number of the motor
springs.

October 2009 Page 93


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION
• If the stand goes down when the vertical brake is unlocked, remove some counterweight plates
from the side of the horizontal arm.
• On the contrary if the stand goes up when the vertical brake is unlocked, add some
counterweight plates on the side of the horizontal arm

The stand movement, when all the covers, cables and accessories are mounted, must be well balanced
along all the central part of the vertical travel. The top 15cm can show a slight movement
downwards, while the bottom 15cm can show a slight movement upwards; this is perfectly normal

4.7. Calibrations
4.7.1. Display calibration

For instructions on the equipment electronic instruments calibration, refer to the specific technical
instruction that come with the equipment.

4.7.2. Positioning and regulation of the potentiometer of beam incidence


For the indication of the beam incidence, a potentiometer is used (splinted to the posterior extremity of
the horizontal shaft) and locked by a steel flat spring.

4.7.3. Adjustment of the beam centring and alignment


Before the shipment, the equipment is subjected to tests and detailed inspections in the factory. Also
the mechanical parts adjustment is made during the inspection, but because of the impossibility to
reproduce the same installation conditions (different way of mounting of rails and bridge), little
adjustments could be necessary.

Adjustments must be done at the end of the mounting, when X-Ray tube and collimator are installed.

Adjustment around the vertical axis:


This regulation has the purpose to bring the horizontal arm parallel to the rails of the bridge.

1) remove the horizontal arm cover;


2) using an Allen wrench no. 6 (it must be inserted in the screw 3A under the horizontal arm)
and a fixed wrench no. 17 (this keeps the cam 3B on the upper side of the horizontal arm),
loosen a little the screw;
3) keep unlocked the vertical axis brake;
4) act on the cam 3B to find the required working condition;
5) fix the cam 3B in this position, keeping it through the fixed wrench and tighten the Allen
screw 3A;
6) if this operation does not solve the problem, repeat until a good alignment around the vertical
axis is obtained.

Adjustment around the horizontal axis:


This regulation purpose has the possibility to regulate the horizontal functioning of the radiogen
system.

Page 94 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION
1) remove the horizontal arm cover;
2) using an Allen wrench no. 6 (it must be inserted in the screw 1B behind the horizontal arm)
and a fixed wrench no. 15 (this keeps the cam 1A), loosen a little the screw 1B;
3) keep unlocked the horizontal axis brake;
4) act on the cam 1A to find the required working condition;
5) fix the cam 1A in this position, keeping it through the fixed wrench and tighten the Allen
screw 1B;
6) if this operation does not solve the problem, repeat unit a good alignment around the vertical
axis is obtained.

Adjustment of the radiogenic unit perpendicular:


This regulation has the purpose to bring the horizontal arm perpendicularly to the telescope axis.

1) remove the horizontal arm cover;


2) using an Allen wrench no. 6, loosen a little the screws 2A on the front side of the horizontal
arm;
3) act on the dowels 2B , which are positioned on the upper side of the horizontal arm, through
an Allen screw no. 3 (after having unscrewed through a fixed wrench no. 10 the nuts which
lock them);
4) fix screws and nuts, which were loosened before;
5) repeat the operation, if necessary or act on screws 2C and 2D.

October 2009 Page 95


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Picture 19 - Horizontal arm alignment

Page 96 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4.7.4. End of travel on the rotations


To avoid the accidental breakage of the potentiometers, some mechanical end of travel have been
designed by the manufacturer (both on the rotation around the vertical and horizontal axis). Their
position can be modified (also during the equipment installation phase) to better meet the customer’s
needs.

ATTENTION!!!
It is important not to remove the mechanical end of travel (EOF) to avoid the potentiometers
breaking.

This ceiling suspension version, is supplied with both ends of travel (both on the rotation around the
horizontal axis and on the rotation around the vertical axis).
To move the end of travel on the rotation around the vertical axis do as follow:

1) Remove the metallic block fastened to the detent disk by a countersink screw;
2) Uncouple the potentiometer from the gearing;
3) Move the end of travel block on a different hole (there are four different ways of fastening,
offered by four different holes);
4) Check the researched freedom of moving;
5) Couple again the potentiometer to the gearing;
6) Check again that everything works properly;
7) Proceed in calibrating the unit electronically (about this, see the Electrical Manual);

ATTENTION!!!
During the movements of the ends of travel, make sure to uncouple the potentiometer so as to avoid
its damage in case a wrong movement takes the potentiometer beyond the measuring interval.
A procedure like the one here described is also valid for moving the end of travel around the
horizontal axis.
But in this case it is necessary to act on the stop dowel.

October 2009 Page 97


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

4.7.5. Regulation of the electromagnetic brakes for the rotational movements


The electromagnetic brakes of the horizontal axis (07.20) and the vertical axis (03.20) are regulated at
the factory in the best way. However, seen the intensive use, it might be necessary to correct the
opening value.
To verify the correct opening of the brake, push the corresponding push button on the control box and
check that there is a uniform distance between the two parts of the brake (the optimal distance is
included between 0,5 and 1,0 mm).

If necessary, correct the distance doing as described below.

4.7.5.1. Regulation of the vertical axis brake


1) Slacken the 6 fastening screws (11.20) placed on the lower side of the horizontal arm (04.20);
2) Act on 6 regulation dowels (10.20) placed on the lower side of the horizontal arm (04.20),
next to the fastening screws (11.20).

Especially, lightly unscrew the regulation dowel in correspondence of the point in which you want to
increase the distance between the brake (03.20) and the anchor fastened to the detent disk (01.20).
Follow the opposite procedure if you wish to decrease the air between brake and anchor.

Repeat the operation above described on all the 6 regulation dowels

3) Block again the 6 fastening screws (11.20) placed on the lower side of the horizontal arm
(04.20).

4.7.5.2. Regulation of the horizontal axis brake


1) Slacken the 4 fastening screws (06.20) placed on the rear side of the horizontal arm (04.20);
2) Act on the 2 dowels and on the 2 regulation screws (09.20 e 08.20) placed on the inside side
of the plate of the rear brake.

Especially, lightly unscrew the regulation dowel in correspondence of the point where you want to
increase the distance between the brake (07.20) and the anchor fastened to the detent disk (05.20).
Follow the opposite procedure if you wish to decrease the air between the brake and the anchor.

Repeat the operation described above on all the 6 regulation dowels

3) Block again the 4 fastening screws (06.20).

Page 98 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CEILING STAND INSTALLATION

Picture 20 – Regulation of the electromagnetic brakes

Pos. Description Quantity


01 VERTICAL DETENT DISK 1
02 ALUMINUM VERTICAL SHAFT 1
03 VERTICAL AXIS BRAKE 1
04 HORIZONTAL ARM 1
05 HORIZONTAL DETENT DISK 1
SCREW TCCE M6x16 4
06
SPRING WASHER D6 4
07 HORIZONTAL AXIS BRAKE 1
08 SCREW TE M6x16 2
09 SCREW STCE M6x14 2
10 SCREW STCE M5x30 6
SCREW TCCE M4X25 6
11
SPRING WASHER D4 6x3

4.7.6. Automatic collimator calibration

For automatic collimator calibration make reference to the RALCO collimator instruction manual in
“System Tasks and Procedures”.

• Verify the FFD distances.


• Verify the cassette sizes.

October 2009 Page 99


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 MONITOR SUSPENSION INSTALLATION

5. Monitor suspension installation


CATASTROPHIC FAILURE MAY OCCUR IF ORIGINAL DESIGN LIMITS ARE EXCEEDED. DO
NOT ATTEMPT A FIELD MODIFICATION TO INCREASE LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY OF ANY
MONITOR SUSPENSION. REFER TO THE LABEL ON THE SUSPENSION FOR THE
SUSPENSION’S MAXIMUM LOAD CAPACITY.

For more detailed information make reference to PORTEGRA2 Installation Manual PTZ15002E by MAVIG

Page 100 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 MONITOR SUSPENSION INSTALLATION

5.1. Prerequisites
• Stationary rails already installed according to instructions in the section 03.
• Bridge and Mounting Plate already assembled (see Figure 5-1).

Pos. Description
01 LONGITUDINAL RAILS
02 TRANSVERSAL BRIDGE
03 RIGHT BEARING SUPPORT
04 GUIDE BRIDGE TIE
05 LEFT BEARING SUPPORT
06 BUMPERS
07 RAILS HEAD
Figure 5-1.

October 2009 Page 101


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 MONITOR SUSPENSION INSTALLATION

5.2. Suspension assembly


For details please make reference to PORTEGRA2 Installation Manual PTZ15002E by MAVIG

5.2.1. Grounding the Portegra2 system

WARNING: Electrical connections of the ceiling column must be performed by licensed or qualified
personnel according to local regulations (GEF standard).

1) Connect external grounding cable (provided by electrical services on site!) to grounding point
E (single monitor support) or X ( double monitor support)

Single monitor support Double monitor support

Note: monitor suspension ground cable D38, code 56144

IMPORTANT
For more information, please make reference to PORTEGRA2 Installation Manual PTZ15002E by
MAVIG

Page 102 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 MONITOR SUSPENSION INSTALLATION

5.3. Monitor installation


5.3.1. Double monitor suspension with LCD type monitors
1) Use the furnished belts to keep the Monitor Holder in a lower position for easier when
working.
2) Mount both monitors to the suspension with screws M4x10 (4 pcs/monitor) furnished in the
support kit. Use plastic plugs for deeper holes as Figure 5-11. shows.
Connecting the cables to the monitors please refer to Monitor Documentation.
The next figures show the cables connecting to the monitor before and after reattach the back covers.

Monitor Monitor
Power Cable Video Cable

Figure 5-11

October 2009 Page 103


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 MONITOR SUSPENSION INSTALLATION

5.3.2. Double monitor suspension (for analogical system version)

Monitor Camera Video


Power Cable signal Cable

Figure 5-12.

5.3.3. Single monitor suspension with LCD type monitor

1) Use the furnished belts to keep the Monitor Holder in a lower position for easier when
working.
2) Mount the monitor to the suspension with screws M4x12 (4 pcs) furnished in the support kit.

Connecting the cables to the monitor please refer to LCD Monitor Documentation.

Page 104 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6. Table installation
See pre installation manual for room preparation information and base plate fixation.

Before fixing the elevation group, you shall make sure that the plate for the fixation of the table to the
floor is positioned according to the specifications detailed in pre-installation manual and safety
regulations.
Possible discrepancies compared with the specifications of pre-installation may determine a bad
functioning of the equipment.

6.1. Mechanical dimensions overview


6.1.1. Non-elevating table

Precision RXi non-elevating table

October 2009 Page 105


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Precision RXi non-elevating table

Make reference to the following items for ceiling limitations:


The minimum exam room ceiling height for not having table ceiling movement limitations is 2,91
meters. It is possible to install the table even in an exam room with a minimum ceiling height of
2,40 meters.
In this case it will be necessary to set the table with the new ceiling height by following the adjustment
procedure manual.
If you do not want to have ceiling limitation with the longitudinal patient tabletop movement (table
in vertical position) the minimum ceiling height must be at least of 2,80 meters.

Page 106 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.1.2. Non-elevating table base plate


Plate supplied as a serial standard accessory (screws and bolts are supplied with base plate)
Fixation plate code 43761 (weight: 114 kg).
Concrete floor, min. height: 200mm (concrete as per Table “DIN 1045 BN350”).
Small blocks of the LIEBIG SK15/95 type, length 145mm, code GMM 39685.
Make six holes in the floor: the holes will be as follows: 15 mm diameter x 145mm.
By means of the special shims supplied, you shall level the plate with a flatness of max. 1mm/m,
(Fig. 3 page 108).
Check the proper flatness by means of the special ruler code 44689.
Tighten the screws by means of a 50N/m driving torque.

Table
cable
support
slot

Base plate with N.6


holes 16mm each. Fig. 1: Base plate for non-elevating table

X-Rays beam middle reference line

October 2009 Page 107


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.1.3. Non-elevating table fixation by means of small blocks

Fig. 2: Drawing 44235

Shim
0.5 mm
1.0 mm
1.5 mm
6 shims are provided for each
measure specified in the table. These
Fig. 3: Shims provided as serial standard accessories are to be used for leveling next to the
special screws.

Page 108 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.1.4. Elevating table

Precision RXi elevating table

Precision RXi elevating table - plan view

October 2009 Page 109


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
Make reference to the following items for ceiling limitations:
The minimum exam room ceiling height for not having table ceiling limitations is of 2,91 meters. It
is possible to install the table even in an exam room with a minimum ceiling height of 2,40 meters.
In this case it will be necessary to set the table with the new ceiling height by following the
adjustment procedure manual.
If you don’t want to have ceiling limitation with the longitudinal patient tabletop movement (table
in vertical position) the minimum ceiling height must be at least of 2,80 meters.

Page 110 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.1.5. Elevating table base plate


Fixation by means of small blocks. Fixation plate code 42003 (weight: 100 kg).
Concrete floor, min. height: 200mm (concrete as per the Table “IN 1045 BN350”).
Small blocks of the LIEBIG M10 S15/70 type having a length of 145mm, code GMM 40710.
Make 4 holes in the floor having a 15mm diameter x 145mm.
By means of the special shims supplied, you shall level the plate with a flatness of max 0.7mm/m,
(Fig. 6 page 112).
Check the proper flatness by means of the special ruler supplied, code 44689.
Tighten the screws by means of a 50 N/m driving torque.

X-Rays beam middle reference line

Fig. 4: Base plate elevating with a floor minimum bearing of 1065 kg / square meter

October 2009 Page 111


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.1.6. Elevating table fixation by means of small blocks

Fig. 5: Drawing 44556A

Shim
0,5 mm
1 mm
1,5 mm
6 shims are provided for each
measure specified in the table. These
Fig. 6: Shims supplied as serial standard accessories are to be used for levelling next to the
special screws.

Page 112 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.2. Tilting group installation


6.2.1. Non-elevating table
1) Withdraw the tilting group from its packing.

Fig. 7 Tilting group

2) Move the tilting group onto the pallet

Fig. 8 Moving the tilting group

October 2009 Page 113


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
3) Place the tilting group on the fixation plate that was previously fixed to the floor

Fig. 9 Positioning the tilting group

4) Secure the tilting group to the fixation plate by means of the 6 M12x25 hexagonal-head
screws (A/Fig. 10).

Fig. 10: Non elevating table fixation of the tilting group

Page 114 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.2.2. Elevating table


1) Attach the ramp to the palette that holds the tilting group. (Fig. 11)

Fig. 11: Elevation group

2) Remove the four bolts that hold the tilting group to the palette. (Fig. 12)

Fig. 12: Four bolts

3) Lower the dolly wheels to raise the tilting group. (Fig. 13)

October 2009 Page 115


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Fig. 13: Dolly wheels

4) Roll the tilting group off the palette and place on the fixation plate that was previously fixed
or embedded into the floor.
5) Lower the tilting group onto the fixation plate and adjust the height of the wheels by means of
the 4 screws placed on the ends of the jacks (A/Fig. 13).

Fig. 14: Tilting group

6) Remove the pair of jacks provided for the transport (Fig. 14) by loosing the 4 bushes fixing
the jacks themselves to the elevation group (B/Fig. 15).

Page 116 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Fig. 15: Adjustment and fixation screws

7) Secure the tilting group to the fixation plate by means of the 6 M12x80 hexagonal-head
screws.

October 2009 Page 117


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.3. Table frame installation


1) Lower ramp to ground (Fig. 16)

Fig. 16

2) Remove wood used to block system in place (Fig. 17)

Fig. 17

Page 118 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
3) Remove bolts that hold dolly to palette supports and roll dolly off palette (Fig. 18)

Fig. 18

Fig. 19 shows how the table appears after being unwrapped from the cellophane sheets.
4) Remove the cables (A/Fig. 19) from the support (B/Fig. 19), remove the support itself by
unloosing the two M8x70 screws with washer and nut (C/Fig. 19).

A C

Fig. 19: Table on the jack

October 2009 Page 119


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.3.1. Remove the stand group

1) Move the cable to the arm support pole right side

Fig. 20: Stand on the jack

2) Take off the screw and mount the arm into the support pole (pay attention to the cables
position)

Page 120 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
3) Anchor the arm hock to the column lifting support

4) Take off the M8x20 hexagonal-head screws fixing the column to the trolley

October 2009 Page 121


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
5) Rotate the X-ray housing column support to its left side

6) Lift and rotate the column in order to position the column to the floor (Warning: pay attention
to not damage the compressor during this phase !)

Attention
to the
compressor

Page 122 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
7) Take the arm hock out from the column lifting support

8) Dismount the lifting arm from the trolley

October 2009 Page 123


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.3.2. Mount the table in the base support


1) Remove the two screws fixing the structure onto the jack (A/Fig.21)
2) Turn the structure so as to place it in the horizontal position
3) Adjust the table height by means of the 4 screws allowing the adjustment of the jack
(B/Fig.21) in order to obtain the perfect alignment of the guides of the central bar compared
with the trolley of the base.

CAUTION – The table will be unbalanced and should be moved carefully

Fig.21: The jack

4) Disconnect the pinion (B/ Fig. 22) of the tilting group from the gear (D/ Fig. 22).
5) Place the rotation shaft (A/ Fig. 22) making sure that the set screw is facing upwards.
6) By means of the 4 screws ensuring the adjustment of the jack height you shall adjust the table
height (B/Fig.21 so as to obtain a perfect alignment of the central bar guides compared with
the trolley of the base.
7) Insert the central bar in the tilting group paying attention in order to avoid any possible
damage to the bearings or the bar painting (Fig. 23).
8) Slide the bar so as to place it in the centered position compared with the tilting group. Now
you shall verify that the tab of the rotation shaft id directed upwards
9) Connect the pinion (B/ Fig. 22) of the tilting group to the gear (D/ Fig. 22).
10) Secure the pinion (B/ Fig. 22) by means of the special M8x10 dowel (C/ Fig. 22).

Page 124 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

D
A

Fig. 22: Pinion of the tilting Fig. 23: Fitting of the adjustable height-central bar

Fig. 24: Fixation of the trolley

11) Again check perfectly center the central bar with respect to the tilting group.
12) Unloose the 8 M8x25 screws with flat washer and grower (A/Fig. 24) and remove the jack
(B/Fig. 24).
13) Remove the trolley (C/Fig. 24) by slipping it from the central bar.

October 2009 Page 125


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.3.3. Non-elevating tilting group mechanical stop assembling


In case of the non elevating model, it is necessary to follow the written below procedure in order to
assemble the equipment mechanical stop:
1) move the equipment in horizontal position
2) assemble the mechanical block (A/Fig. 25) on the rack (it is positioned under the central
frame traverse) by N°2 screws T.C.E.I. M10x25 (B/Fig. 25)

Fig. 25: Non-elevating tilting group mechanical stop assembling

Page 126 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.4. Stand group

1) Mount the lifting arm to the trolley support pole and tighten the screws

Warning!
It is very important to
fix this screw.

2) Move the screw pulley position to the last lifting arm hole. Pay attention to the lifting device
position, make reference to the below drawings

October 2009 Page 127


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.4.1. Stand group assembly


1) Free the rod of the compressor bar by unloosing the M5x16 hexagonal-head screw with
washer and nut (A/Fig. 26).
2) Remove the fixation support of the stand (B/Fig. 26), by unloosing the two M12x50 fixation
screws (C/Fig. 26).
3) Fix by adhesive tape the connecting rod to the column

Fig. 26: Trolley fixation bracket

4) Remove the two bolts from the top of the stand trolley and turn the foot-end rear bolt back
until it is flush with the inside of the casting as shown in (Fig. 27).

Fig. 27

Page 128 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
5) Move the lifting hock to the column equipment lateral position and lift the column
(Pay attention: to not damage the compressor during this phase!)

Warnings
to the
compressor

6) Rotate the column X ray housing support to its original position

7) Remove the stop bracket of the stand trolley (B/Fig. 29)


8) Move the stand trolley to the center of the table.
9) Restore the bracket in its original position in order to avoid any possible movements of the
trolley.

October 2009 Page 129


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
10) Place a wooden block at about 1 meter from the back trolley on the table and as a second step
insert the column into proper table column basement.

ATTENTION
Insert here the wooden block
Fig. 28

8) Lift the stand and place one end in the stand trolley and the other on the wooden block as
shown in (Fig. 28)

ATTENTION
Insert here the
wooden block

Page 130 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
9) Loosely secure the stand to the stand trolley using the foot-end rear M10x50 hexagonal-head
screw (A/Fig. 29) and the foot-end front M12x50 screw with flat washer and grower (A/ Fig.
30).

ATTENTION!
Do not block
A these screws!

A
B
Fig. 29: Stand back fixation Fig. 30: Stand front fixation

10) Dismount the column lifting support

October 2009 Page 131


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
11) Rotate the stand to 90º placing it in the vertical position.

11) Complete fixing the stand to the trolley using the other the M12x50 screw with flat washer
(A/Fig. 31) and grower on the front side and the two M12x50 screws with flat washer and
grower (A/Fig. 32) on the top rear.

A
A

Fig. 31: Stand fixation (front side) Fig. 32: Stand fixation (back side)

Page 132 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
12) Move the column so it is offset from the spot film device.
13) Ensure the numbered side is facing forward and connect the compressor rod to the SFD by
means of the two M5x14 screws (A/Fig. 33).

Fig. 33: Fixation of the rod to the SFD

14) Move the stand to the centered position.


15) Fit the stand reduction gear.
16) The reduction gear of the stand is fixed by means of one fixation screw M8 + flat washer and
a grower (A/Fig. 34 – Fig. 35) and three dowels inserted in the structure and acting as guides
(B/Fig. 34).

A
A

Fig. 34: Stand motor Fig. 35: Fitting of the Stand reduction gear

October 2009 Page 133


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
17) Connect the motor cable to the terminal board 3Tb3-1,2 and the dynamo cable to the terminal
board 3Tb3-3,4,5 as shown in Fig. 36.
18) Tie wrap the motor cable to the tie wrap bracket provided to hold it flat inside the casting.
19) Connect the potentiometer cable to the terminal board 3Cp3

Fig. 36: Stand motor connection

Fig. 37: Stand motor potentiometer

Page 134 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.5. Installation of the table cables support

ATTENTION:
The base plate for the elevating table allows only one position for fixing the table cable support,
while the base plate for the non-elevating table allows two fixation positions. Please make reference
to Fig. 1: Base plate for non-elevating table in order to establish which position shall be used.

1) Remove the covers on the cable support and bolt the cable support to the base plate using the
four M6X16 screws with flat washer and grower (B/Fig. 38).
2) Place the cables applying to the tilting and elevation (A/Fig. 38) within the four fixation holes
of the table cable support (B/Fig. 38).

Fig. 38: Fitting of the cables on the table cables support

October 2009 Page 135


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
3) Using tie wraps, fasten the cables from the table to the top cross-piece of the cable support at
the point on the cables indicated by first piece the black tape (A/Fig. 39)

Fig. 39

4) Fasten the cables to the bottom cross-piece at the point on the cables indicated by the second
piece of black tape.
5) Verify that there is 850 ±50 mm of cable between the table and the cable support.
6) Tie-wrap the cables in place in the cable exit bracket (Fig. 40).

Fig. 40

7) Run the ground wire from the cable group into the table tilting group and connect to the
ground stud (Fig. 41)
8) Replace the front cover of the cable support (Fig. 42)

Page 136 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Fig. 41 Fig. 42

9) Using tie wraps, fasten the cables from the stand to the top cross-piece of the cable support at
the point on the cables indicated by first piece the black tape
10) Fasten the cables to the bottom cross piece at the point on the cables indicated by the second
piece of black tape.
11) The cables should run down the back of the cable support and there should be 1800±50mm of
cable between the column and the cable support. (Fig. 44)
12) Attach the rear cover of the cable support.

Fig. 43

October 2009 Page 137


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Fig. 44

1800 ±50mm 850 ±50mm

Fig. 45: Cables length

Page 138 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.6. Power cabinet and control panel


6.6.1. Power cabinet
1) Remove the key that is tie wrapped to the vents on the cabinet door and open the door
(Fig. 46)
2) Remove the four bolts in the base of the cabinet that hold the cabinet to the palette.
3) Place the cabinet in the desired position in the room.

Fig. 46

6.6.1.1. Cabinet power positioning


Place the power cabinet according to what specified in the layout.
Place the connection cables in their ducts:
Useful length of the cables from the base of the table cable support to the base of the right side of the
power cabinet: 3.5 meters.
Fix the power cabinet to the wall by means of the special nogs and hooks (bolts)

6.6.1.2. Cabinet wall fixation


Note: anchors and bolts required for fixing the cabinet to the wall are not provided.

1) Before fixing the cabinet to the wall, verify that the wall can support 50kg per bolt.
2) The wall should be drilled at 1978 mm from the floor.
3) Drill 2 φ12mm, 60mm deep holes, 1978 mm from the floor for the support bracket.
4) The distance between the holes should be 400 mm

October 2009 Page 139


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
The anchors measures required for wall bracket are:
Nogs (anchor) external diameter φ 12 mm
Nogs (anchor) legth: 50mm
Bolts diameter: φ 6mm

Wall hole measures:


Wall hole depth: 60mm, wall hole diameter : φ 12mm

Power cabinet fixed to the wall by anchors and bolts

400 mm
1978 mm
from the Brackets
floor to
the holes
brackets
support
Table cabinet
Front view

Fig. 47: Fixation to the wall

3
3

23 5.5 5

34

Fig. 48: Positioner cabinet (measure in cm).

Page 140 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.6.1.3. Cabinet floor fixation


How to fix the table cabinet using bottom holes:
4 holes in the cabinet Ø 13 mm (see Fig. 49).
4 bolts M10 type, holes diameter 16 mm, holes depth = 80 mm or 4 bolts M8 type, holes diameter
14 mm, holes depth = 70 mm.

ATTENTION: the preferred fixation is the fixation to the wall (see Fig. 47)!

227

Ø 13
487

Fig. 49: Bottom holes


Measure in mm.

6.6.1.4. Power cabinet dimensions

Cabinet dimension
Cabinet width 600 mm
Cabinet depth 340 mm
Cabinet height 1960 mm
Cabinet weight 140 kg ÷ 170 kg

October 2009 Page 141


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.6.2. Control panel


6.6.2.1. Control panel without support
Withdraw table control panel from its packing.
Place the control panel according to what specified by the layout.

Fig. 50

6.6.2.2. Control panel positioning


1) Place the integrated console in the desired location.
2) Fix the console to the floor using two φ8 x 60 mm bolts
3) The control panel will be installed in the console in the factory.

Useful length of the cables between the control panel and the base of the right side of the power
cabinet: 15 meters.
No direct connection between the control panel and the remote-controlled table.
Should the use of the support plate be foreseen, it will be necessary to fix the support plate onto the
floor by means of two screw-nogs.(bolts)

N° 2 Bolts to fix the console onto the floor.

Page 142 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.7. Fan fitting


1) Mount the fan group and fasten it by the two screws TCEI M6x16 (A/Fig. 51) with a plain
washer and a grower to the X-ray housing base
2) Secure the fixing plate to the X-ray tube by means of four M6x20 screws if required (B/Fig.
51).

Fig. 51 : Fan mounting

October 2009 Page 143


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.8. Fitting of the X-Ray tube housing without trunnion ring

ATTENTION
Carefully follow the mounting instructions and make sure that the collimator is correctly assembled.
Incorrect mounting could be dangerous: it could cause the collimator to fall.

Accessories included with every collimator:


Nr. 1 Fixed mounting flange 20 mm. thickness - or nr. 1 rotating mounting flange 18,5 mm thickness.
Nr. 3 Spacers for mounting flange 1,5 mm thickness.

1) One L-shaped support is used to assemble the X-ray tube housing without trunnion ring. The X-ray
tube housing and the collimator flange are fixed at the same time to the L-shaped support (Fig. 53).

FOCAL SPOT

Fig. 52 Fig. 53

2) Before fitting the X-ray tube housing, check that during the assembling of the components shown in
Fig. 53 the outer alignment at 80 mm ± 1 mm is obtained, as shown in Fig. 52.

NOTE
Nr. 1 spacer 1,5 mm thickness is required with the rotating flange 18,5 mm thickness.
No spacer is required with the fixed flange 20 mm thickness to obtain the outer alignment at 80 mm.

3) During the assembling process above described, check that the four M6 screws engage at least 10
full threads (10 mm) in the tube port face.

4) Place and fix the X-ray tube housing onto the stand by means of four M8 nogs with flat washer
(A/Fig. 54).

Page 144 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Fig. 54: Fitting of the X-ray tube

ATTENTION: Should not the tubes be the standard types, please make reference to the specific kits.

October 2009 Page 145


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.9. Fitting of the X-Ray tube housing with trunnion ring


1) Secure the fixing plate to the X-ray tube by means of four M6x20 screws if required.
2) Place and fix the X-ray housing onto the stand by means of four M8 nogs with flat washer
(A/Fig. 55).

Fig. 55: Fitting of the X-ray tube

ATTENTION: Should not the tubes be the standard types, please make reference to the specific kits.

ATTENTION: Do not connect the cables yet!


To connect cables make reference to the paragraph 6.15.3.
Cables must be inserted through the cover (see following picture).

Page 146 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.10. Collimator flange mounting (for X-Ray tube housing with trunnion ring)

ATTENTION
Carefully follow the mounting instructions and make sure that the collimator is correctly assembled.
Incorrect mounting could be dangerous, it could cause the collimator to fall.
IMPORTANT NOTE: you shall check that the fixation screws used to secure the collimator are the
proper ones as follows: verify that they protrude through the flange and spacers far enough to
engage at least 6 threads (that is to say 6 mm) into the tube port face.

Accessories included with every collimator:


nr. 1 Mounting flange 18,5 mm thickness
nr. 3 Spacers for mounting flange 1,5 mm thickness

1) Determine the distance from the focal spot to the tube port face (Fig. 56)
2) Subtract the resulting distance from 80 mm. and determine how many 1,5 mm spacers
combined with the 18,5 mm thickness of the mounting flange will be required to make up the
difference.
3) The outer face of the collimator-mounting flange must be at 80 mm. from the focal spot,
where the allowable tolerance is ±1 mm.
4) Select four bolts of suitable thread (TSEI M6 ) and of such a length that they protrude through
the flange and spacers far enough to engage at least 6 threads into the tube port face.

FOCAL SPOT
18,5

Fig. 56

October 2009 Page 147


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.11. Fitting of the collimator


1) Place the collimator with the base plate on the flange of the X-ray tube so that the top blades
of the collimator (1/Fig. 57) are parallel to the longitudinal axis of the X-ray tube.
2) Tighten the screws placed on the four angles (2/Fig. 57).
3) Verify that the fixing tabs (3/Fig. 57) moved by the screws properly set over the flange of the
tube to ensure proper centering on the flange of the tube.
4) Remove the back cover of the collimator (5/Fig. 57) by unscrewing the fixing screw
(4/Fig. 57).
5) Connect the cable code 55258 to the connector 3Cm1 (A/Fig. 58).
6) Connect the ground wire of the collimator and the cable screen to the ground screw
(B /Fig. 58).
7) Secure the cables and the relevant protection cover by means of the proper cable-fastener
(C/Fig. 58).
8) Restore the back cover in its original position.

1
3

4
2

Fig. 57: Collimator

Make sure when putting back the collimator cover that you do not short the thermal device to
the ground through the cover screws

Page 148 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Fig. 58 : Collimator connections

6.11.1. R302/006/MLP/A - R503/006/MLP/A collimator fitting


1) Manually adjust the collimator shutters to their widest setting.
2) Carefully couple the collimator with the tube to ascertain that the primary shutters have
clearance to move in the port opening.
3) Place the collimator on the flange.
4) Tighten the four mounting screws equally until the collimator is held firmly on the tube
housing.
5) Check to see that the distance from the collimator housing to the mounting flange is equal in
all directions and that the collimator face is parallel to the axis of the table.

6.11.2. Power connection


1) Unscrew the three screws on the back cover and remove the cover.
2) Loosen the free part of the cable clamp. (A/Fig. 59).
3) Connect the cable cod.55258 to the connector on the collimator. (B/Fig. 59).
4) Connect the collimator earth cable cod.55220 and the cable screen to the earth screw
(C/Fig. 59).
5) Tighten the cable clamp and screws to immobilize the cable.
6) Reassemble the back cover and the connector cover.

October 2009 Page 149


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

B
C

Fig. 59 : Ralco collimator – power connections

ATTENTION
Make sure to reassemble correctly the external cover without leaving fissures or small openings
between the parts

6.11.3. Collimator rotation screw lock

Collimator rotated to the left side Centered collimator Collimator rotated to the right side

It is possible to lock the collimator with a screw in the center position in case the country regulatory do
not allows the ±90° collimator rotation.
The following picture shows the screw position to lock the collimator rotation feature.

Page 150 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.12. Fan connecting


1) Connect the cable cod. 55433 to the fan (A/Fig. 60) and fasten the earth cable (B/Fig. 60).

A
B

Fig. 60 : Fan connections

October 2009 Page 151


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.13. Topographic components disposition


The remote controlled table is consisting of the tilting group and elevation table, patient tabletop,
stand column, X-ray housing holder collimator and compressor with I.I, spot film device, control panel
and the electrical parts cabinet
In the Fig. 61-pag.152, Fig. 62-pag.153 e Fig. 63-pag.154 are listed the main electrical components
that are parts of the remote controlled table.

1S3
display console board 1 Puls
Stop push button

Polycarbonate control
panel for console

Joystick (with
switches)

X -ray push button


Joystick (with
potentiometers)

Console control
panel board

CPU console board

Optical fibers

Fig. 61: Console components disposition

Page 152 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

28 25S3 - I/O board


27 25S2 - Assi board
26 25S1 - CPU Host board
28 25 Fan group
24S9 - Operation unit for step by step
24
27 motors
24S8 - Transversal cassette holder
26 23
unit
20 22 24S7 - IB / DF operation unit
19 25 21 24S6 - //Cassette holder operation unit
20 24S5 - 120Vcc power supply
18 24 19 24S4 - Grid operation unit
23 24S3 - Crossed diaphragms operation
17 18
unit
22 17 24S2 - //Diaphragms operation unit
16
16 24S1 - 85Vcc power supply
21 15 23S10 - Bus Mini operation unit
9 15 14 23S9 - Bus CD operation unit
13 23S8 - Collimator operation unit
8 14 12 23S7 - Footrest rotation
7 23S6 - Operation unit
13 11
tabletop/Compressor
6 10 23S5 - CD operation unit brake
12
9 23S4 - Spot film device operation unit
11 8
23S3 - Stand operation unit/Long.
4 p.tabletop .
10 7 23S2 - Elevation operation unit
3 6 23S1 - Tilting operation unit
2 5 22TR3 - Autotransformer
5 4 22TR2 - Utilities transformer
1 3 22TR1 - Power supply transformer
2 22Filter - Network filter
1 Base plate

Fig. 62: Power cabinet components disposition

October 2009 Page 153


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

3Mt12
3Mt13
Motore Cassetto Trasversale
Motore Diaframmi paralleli
Transversal cassette holder motor
Parallel dia phragms motor
3Mt11
Motore Cassetto In/Out
3Mt14 In/Out c assette holder motor
Motore Diaframmi a Croce
Crossed diaphra gms motor 3Mt15
Motore Griglia
Grid motor
3Mt10
Motore Piano p.p. 3Pt17
Tabletop motor Potenziometro Piano
Longitud.
Long. tabletop
3Pt4 potentiometer
Potenziometro Seriografo
SFD potentiometer 3Mt17
Motore
3Mt5 Piano Longitud.
Motore Distanza Focale Long. tabletop motor
Focal distance motor
3Mt4
3Mt3 Motore Seriografo
Motore Stativo SFD motor
Stand motor 3Mt7,8,9 – 3Pt7,8,9
3Pt3 Motori e potenziometri
Potenziometro Stativo Collimatore Parallelo
Stand potentiometer Perpendicolare e Iride
Potentiometers a nd motors
3Mt1 parallel/perpendicular collimator & Iris
Motore Ribaltamento
Tilting motor
3Mt6
3Pt1 Compressor m otor
Potenziometro Ribaltamento
Tilting potentiometer
3Mt18
3Pt2 Footrest rotating
Potenziometro Elevazione motor
Elevation potentiometer
3Mt16
3Mt2 I.I. motor
Motore Elevazione
Elevation motor

Fig. 63: Table tilting components disposition

Page 154 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.14. Remote controlled table exam room position and connections lengths
The Fig. 64 at page 156 shows the layout of the exam room table components, the cables input/output
and maximum cables connections length. This layout is a mere example since several combinations are
possible. We consider the remote controlled table position and its control panel: this is always placed
in front of the remote controlled table itself but it can be moved onto the left the right with reference to
the center of gravity of the equipment according to the normal or reverse usage of the remote
controlled table itself. This table control panel position ensures an easier and more immediate patient
visibility when the remote controlled table is in vertical position +90° or –90° (reverse).
The most frequent exam room equipment combinations are the following
1) Generator cabinet and remote controlled table cabinet: both positioned on the left wall side
behind the remote controlled table
2) Generator cabinet and remote controlled table cabinet both positioned on the right wall side
behind the remote controlled table
3) Generator cabinet on the left wall side and table cabinet on the right wall side behind the
remote controlled table
4) Generator cabinet positioned on the right wall side and table cabinet positioned on the left
wall side behind the remote controlled table.
The connection cables lengths between the generator cabinet and the table cabinet are not important in
the first or second combinations type.
Other combinations are possible depending on the exam room dimension and configuration. In the
exam room can be positioned other devices, for instance generator, digital system, stand, wall bucky,
monitor trolley or monitor suspension, etc., for this components position and their cables length and
position make reference to their proper technical manuals.
Power supply cables and equipotential:
Power supply cables and ground cables are supplied in their maximum length, as far as the supply
cables and ground cables are concerned, we have indicated only the maximum length (not the usable
length) since we do not know the mains supply panel provided in the X-ray room.
The main supply panel must be easily reachable by the operator, but since the equipments inside the
room are live (hot) this panel must be placed next to the cabinets (in order to meet with the Standards
requirements) and must be visible to the Service engineer intervening on the equipments (when the
Service engineer clears one or some of the installed equipments he must be sure that nobody can feed
it/them again: in case the main supply panel is not visible to the engineer it is necessary to protect it by
means of a safety panel (or other protection) equipped with an alarm signal alerting the engineer it is
necessary to lock it and remove the key before starting working on the equipments.
Cables length connection between the cabinet and the console:
The useful cables length between table cabinet and the console is 14 meters.
Cables length connection between tilting table and generator cabinet:
The useful cables length between tilting table and generator cabinet is 4 meters and it is determined by
12 meters high voltage cables
Cables length connection between table and its cabinet
The useful length between table and its cabinet is 3 meters.
Cables length connection between generator cabinet and table cabinet:
This is necessary only in case the two cabinets are positioned far from each other, the cables length
must be of 6 meters.
In addition take always into consideration 1meter of margin just in case of long distance.

October 2009 Page 155


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Fig. 64:Cables length and position

Page 156 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.14.1. Connection cables identification


Connection cables are identified by the labels positioned near the connections head cables.
The labels identify the source, the cable code and the destination.

Cable label example:

Source
Code
Destination

25S3CP1 Cabinet group connection 25


Board S3
Connector CP1

55234 Manufacturing cable code

3PT1 Tilting group connecting 3


Potentiometer PT1

Each wire is identified by a small ring or label that shows the connection.

Make reference to the interconnections tables in the Drawings manual (5142538-100 Drawings).

October 2009 Page 157


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.15. Electrical connections


See also section 8 “Electrical connections”.

The Table models are in compliance with the requirements of the 89/336/CEE Directive applying to
the electromagnetic compatibility (please make reference to section 0 ‘General notes’). This is why
all the connections must be executed in respect of the following instructions:
All the cables must be secured to the structure by means of the proper conductive cable fastener.
The conductive cable-fasteners must be secured by means of a picots washer and flat washer,
according to what shown in the scheme of Fig. 65 .
Make sure that the peeling of the cables are properly executed before fixing the cables themselves.
The conductive cable-fasteners used must be the same as those specified in the following
drawings and must not be replaced in any case by cable-fasteners having different dimensions.

Fixing
screw
Flat
washer
Conductive
cable-fastener
Picots
washer

Fig. 65 : Fixing scheme of the cables

The conductive cable-fasteners specified in the scheme are as follows:

Type Description
A = Small Conductive cable-fastener FGC-3 (M4)
B = Medium Conductive cable-fastener FGC-5 (M4)
C = Large Conductive cable-fastener FGC-8 (M4)

ATTENTION
The equipment must not work without the conductive fixing cable-fasteners in any case.

Page 158 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.15.1. Power supply and ground


Power supply cables and ground cables must be connected to the cabinet table.

230 Vac power supply:


Ref. Drawing 55456 f.04- in the present Manual
Connect the cable code 55430 to the 22 Filter
Secure the cables to the structure (cabinet plate) by means of the proper conductive cable-fasteners..
For the fixation of the cables, make reference to the note at page 158.

Equipotential node:
Make sure to respect the instructions specified in section 8 “Electrical connections”.
Execute the ground connection with the yellow/green wire having a minimum section of 10 mm2.
Connect ground cable cod.55429 to 20GND0.

6.15.2. Table connections


The standard disassembly procedure is:

1) The cabinet arrives disconnected from the table and from the console.
2) The cables to be connected between the cabinet and the console arrive connected only to the
console.
3) The cables to be connected between the cabinet and table arrive connected only to the table.
4) On the table the cables of the motor 3MT3, the potentiometer 3PT3 and the stand are
disconnected and should be reconnected during the installation.

6.15.3. Connection of the X-Ray tube cables


NOTE: The X-ray tube cables MUST be run through the top X-ray arm cover before being connected.
1) Make sure that the H.T. cables are in good conditions and clean; in any case, we suggest you
should degrease the H.T. cables and apply a light layer of silicon grease.
2) Connect them to the female connections of the X-ray tube, tighten the ring-nuts and secure
them with the relevant nogs (if available).
3) Connect the cables of the anode, thermal safety, X-ray tube ground cable and cooling fan
cable, (if provided).
4) See Fig. 66 for more details.

6.15.4. Connection of the chamber cable DAP


1) Connect to the DAP chamber.
2) Check the length of the cables according to what shown in the following table page 164.

6.15.5. Connection of the cabinet cables


1) Connect the cables to the cabinet.
2) Fix the cables to the cabinet by means of the proper cable-fastener conductive
3) To connect cabinet cables make reference to the 55456 drawing:

October 2009 Page 159


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Drawing 56396 f.01+

Page 160 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Drawing 55456 f.02+

October 2009 Page 161


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Drawing 55456 f.03+

Page 162 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Drawing 55456 f.04

October 2009 Page 163


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

RIGHT SIDE - Cables A


(-) negative H.T. cable cm 103 from the exit to the end of the head
collimator cable (55258) cm 142 from the exit to the end of the connector
cooling fan cable (55673) cm 125 from the exit to the cable terminal
ground cable of the collimator (55220) cm 160 from the exit to the cable terminal
DAP chamber cable (40358) cm 112 from the exit of the connector

LEFT SIDE - Cables B


(+) positive H.T. cable cm 112 from the exit to the end of the head
earth cable (55202) cm 133 from the exit to the cable terminal
thermal safety cable (55656) cm 133 from the exit to the cable terminal
rotating anode cable (55674) cm 133 from the exit to the cable terminal

Right side Cables A

Left side
Cables B

Fig. 66: X-Ray tube cables length

Page 164 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.16. Fitting of the detection chamber

NOTE – For reference only, detection chamber will arrive installed in table.

6.16.1. Standard fitting


The following procedure describes the correct positioning of the chamber inside the spot film device
according to the normal position of the patient (head-side on the left with the table in the horizontal
position).

Withdraw item No. 12 from its packing.


Open the parallel diaphragms completely.
Move the grid-holder to its parking position.
Move the iris diaphragm (if provided) to its parking position.
Remove the four fixing blocks of the chamber.
Insert the detection chamber onto the proper guides (making sure to start inserting from the
cassette-input side).
Place the chamber in the centred position compared with the parallel diaphragms.

Fig. 67: Fitting of the detection chamber

Secure the chamber with the four fixing blocks previously removed (A/Fig. 68).

October 2009 Page 165


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

A
Fig. 68 : Fixation of the detection chamber

Close the parallel diaphragms and move the grid-holder to the X-ray position.
Place and secure the cable of the detection chamber along the guide by means of the proper clamps
(A/Fig. 69).
Connect the cable of the detection chamber with the extension before the input of the cable-holders
chain (Fig. 70).

Fig. 69 : Cables path

Fig. 70 : Connection of the extension cable

Page 166 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.16.2. Reverse fitting


The following procedure describes the proper positioning of the chamber inside the spot film device in
case the equipment is used in reverse modality (head-side on the right with the table in the horizontal
position).

The procedure for inserting the chamber in the reverse position is the same as the procedure used
for the standard fitting.
If you insert the detection chamber in the reverse position, the cables path is turned of 180°
compared with the standard position (Fig. 71).
The connection with the extension cable is executed at the beginning of the guide placed on the
right side of the spot film device.
Execute the fixation of the cables with the clamps and check that they do not interfere with the
movement of the parallel diaphragms.

Fig. 71 : Cables path in the reverse fitting

October 2009 Page 167


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.17. Fitting of the grid

NOTE – For reference only, grid will arrive installed in table.

The grid is normally fitted at our plants.

1) Open the parallel diaphragms completely.


2) Insert the grid into its support-frame.
3) Execute the centering of the grid compared with the parallel diaphragms.
4) Secure the grid by means of the four blocks and the four M3x8 fixing screws M3x8
(A/Fig. 72).

A
Fig. 72 : Fitting of the grid

Page 168 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.18. Mechanical stops of the transversal tabletop


After executing all the electrical cablings, it will be necessary to remove the two mechanical stops of
the transversal tabletop (Figure 1 Head Side and Figure 2 Foot Side) so that it will be possible to
exploit the travel to its full extent which, otherwise, would result to be limited.
To facilitate this transaction is appropriate to move slightly the transversal tabletop.

Figure 2 Foot Side


Figure 1 Head Side

After removing the two mechanical stops Figure 2 Foot Side, you shall insert the 5mm diameter
special caps Figure 3 as shown in the following Figure 4.
Special White caps can be found in the box of screws escort.
Remove the warning labels being highlighted in the Figure 1 Head Side and Figure 2 Foot Side

Figure 3

Figure 4

October 2009 Page 169


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.19. Fitting of the TV chain


1) Tilt the table to 90° (it is not necessary to dismount the tabletop).
2) Withdraw item No.13 from its packing (using the lifting tool).

≈1m

Page 170 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
3) Install the interface plate (9” and 12” II only) on the II support bracket.

4) For 16” II only, remove the bottom II support cross bar.


5) Remove the II bracket from the table by removing the three M8x40 screws (A/Fig. 73).
6) Attach the II bracket to the II with 10 bolts.

7) Tilt back the table to about 20°.

< 0,7 m
≈ 20°

October 2009 Page 171


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
8) Fix the steel rope to the table and to the Image Intensifier.

9) Lift the II bracket (with II) back into position.

Page 172 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

10) Move the SFD in order to align it with the Image Intensifier.

October 2009 Page 173


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
11) Insert the Image Intensifier in its proper position.

Page 174 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
10) Replace the three M8x40 screws (A/Fig. 73).

Fig. 73 : Fixation of the Intensifier system

WARNING !!
DO NOT MOVE
THE SFD
DOWNWARDS !

October 2009 Page 175


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
11) Dismount the steel rope to the table and to the Image Intensifier.

12) If removed, fit the bar of the intensifier group (A/Fig. 74) by means of four M5x10 screws
(position B) and two M5x10 screws (position C).

C
Fig. 74 : Support bar of the intensifier group

13) Remove the cover of the camera.


14) Connect the cables of the TV chain by making reference to the relevant installation manuals
(chapter 7).

ATTENTION!
For analogical version cameras make reference to the following paragraph:
8.6 “Analogical 512 TV chain connections (analogical version only)”
8.7 “Analogical TV chain N33 camera connections (analogical version only)”

Page 176 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Fig. 75 : Cables path

15) Verify that the cables loop allows the ascent and descent movements of the intensifier system.

October 2009 Page 177


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.19.1. Image Intensifier alignment 1


1) Move table to 45° tilt
2) Measure the distance between the II bracket and the II plate in 3 places
3) If this measurement is not 175mm in three places, the 3 M8x40 screws can be adjusted to
change the II alignment.

ATTENTION!
If you unscrew the three alignment screws contemporarily you may create a mechanical contact
between the I.I. sliding guide and its support. In order to avoid this issue it may be useful to insert a
spacer in the position showed in the following figure.

Fig. 76

1
The Image Intensifier system includes the Intensifier tube plus the TV chain.

Page 178 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.20. Starting up
1) Verify that the positions of the table and the X-ray tube housing are perfectly parallel to the
floor.
2) Verify the correct connection of the cables.
3) Check the earth equipotential node.
4) Verify the supply voltage.
5) Verify the proper functioning of the low ceiling safety (if available).
6) Check and configure the table setting in function of exam room characteristic and system
composition.
7) Check the two mechanical stops (See paragraph 6.18 Mechanical stops of the transversal
tabletop page 169).

A wrong setting may cause possible equipment crashing to the ceiling or the walls

ATTENTION
To make easy the equipment disassembling and installation, the equipment is set with the collimator
NOT PRESENT (through the code 019 value 004 the equipment is set with collimator “NOT
PRESENT). Remember to set the code 019 value “005” or “003” (this value is depending on the
equipment collimator type with iris or without iris) after having assembled the equipment collimator.
See paragraph 6.23 page. 190.

The equipment is calibrated and configured in manufacture, do not change the equipment calibration if
it is not required. During equipment installation the service engineer does not have to set any table end
of stroke or modify the configuration related to the hardware. The modification of that configuration
without a proper hardware setting/up-dating can cause equipment damage. Make reference to
“Adjustment manual” to change equipment setting

6.21. Functioning tests and X-Ray


1) Verify the grid’s centering and symmetry.
2) Verify the alignment and the centering of the collimator and X-ray tube.
3) Verify the correspondence between the luminous beam and the X-ray beam.
4) Verify the centering of the cassette-holder.
5) Verify the apertures of the parallel diaphragms.
6) Check the film collimation
7) Check the I.I. collimation
8) Execute the tomographic controls.

October 2009 Page 179


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.22. Final covering operations


6.22.1. Tilting group
6.22.1.1. Non-elevating table
Secure the cover of the tilting group by means of three M4x8 screws.

N. 3 screws M4x8

6.22.1.2. Elevating table


Secure the covers with the screws provided.

Page 180 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

N. 2 screws M4x8 N. 2 screws M4x8

N. 3 screws M4x8 N. 3 screws M4x8

October 2009 Page 181


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

A
N. 4 screws M4x8 N. 4 screws M4x8

N. 3 screws M4x8

N. 1 screws M4x12

Page 182 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.22.2. Stand covering

C
E

Fig. 77 : Stand covering

1) Fit the front cover of the stand (A/Fig. 77) and fix it by means of two M4x8 screws
(A/Fig. 78).

Fig. 78 : Stand’s front cover

October 2009 Page 183


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

2) Fit the stand’s cover (B/Fig. 77) and fix it by means of five M4x8 screws (A/Fig. 79).
3) Fix the two fixation plates by means of M4x10 screws (B/Fig. 79).

B
Fig. 79 : Stand’s cover

4) Divide the top cover of the stand in two parts (Fig. 80).
5) Fit the top cover by combining the two parts to each other and fixing them with the proper
M3x10 screws.
6) Secure the cover onto the stand (C/Fig. 77) by means of one M4x12 screw on the top side and
two M4x8 screws on the front side.

B B

C A

A C

Fig. 80 : Stand’s top cover Fig. 81 : X-ray tube’s cover

7) Divide the top cover of the stand in two parts (Fig. 81).

Page 184 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
8) Fit the top cover by combining the two parts to each other and fixing them by means of the
M3x10 screws.
9) Insert in the -B/Fig. 81- hole the X-ray cables and the centering device cables making sure to
leave the distance necessary for ensuring the tube rotation (Fig. 82).
10) Fix the cover to the stand by means of two M5x10 screws on the top side and two M5x10
screws on the lower side (D/Fig. 77).
11) Cover the H.T. cables and the collimator cables with the specific covers supplied (F/Fig. 77).

Fig. 82

12) Divide the cover of the X-ray tube in two parts (Fig. 83).

Fig. 83 : X-ray tube’s cover change

October 2009 Page 185


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
12) Fit the cover of the X-ray tube by combining the two parts to each other and fixing them by
means of the M3x10 screws.
13) Fix the cover to the X-ray tube by means of the M5x10 screws and two 5x20x1.5 washers on
the top side and two M6x20 screws and two 6x25x3 washers on the lower side of the X-ray
tube (E/Fig. 77).

Page 186 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.22.3. Covering of the cables on the turret


1) Fit the back and the front covers of the turret by means of the six M4x8 screws (these are
black for each cover).
2) Fit the cover of the cables between the turret and the SFD (A/Fig. 84).
3) Fix the cover by means of two plastic clamps on the side of the SFD (B/Fig. 84).
4) Fix the cover by means of the plastic clamp on the side of the turret (C/Fig. 84).
5) Fit the cover of the cables between the turret and the column (D/Fig. 84).
6) Fix the cover by means of the plastic clamp on the side of the turret (E/Fig. 84).
7) Fix the cover by means of the two plastic clamps on the side of the column (F/Fig. 84).

F
B

A
E

Fig. 84

October 2009 Page 187


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.22.4. Image intensifier covering


1) Install II power supply cover
2) Install camera cover (A/Fig. 85)
3) Install II collision sensor
Connect sensor wires
Select the appropriate bolt holes to ensure the sensor ends extend a minimum of 3 cm below the
bottom of the camera cover and screw the bracket to the camera cover (B/Fig. 85)
Attach the sensor cover (Fig. 86).
4) Install II cover (Fig. 87).

B
A

Fig. 85

Fig. 86

Page 188 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Fig. 87

October 2009 Page 189


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.23. Table collimator configuration

An inadequate configuration may determine a bad functioning of the collimator.

The tables are configured and tested at the manufacturing plants with the collimator specified in the
customer’s order. Normally such a configuration is not subject to any further adjustments, but should
you need to execute a modification you shall carry out the following procedure:
Sequence of commands to be executed in order to configure the collimator:

Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto ON (the control panel display applying to the ”layer height and tilting
angle” will visualize 000).

Acquisition Adjustable tabletop height Stand angle Available


frequency or Layer height Tilting angle exposures
image review

By means of the P34 (increase) and P35 (decrease) push-buttons you shall select the code
concerned (this is visualized on the “layer height” display).

COLLIMATOR CONFIGURATION code 019

By means of the P31 (backwards) and P32 (onwards) push-buttons you can select
the wanted type of collimator. (This will be visualized on the “Layer height”
display).
R302 MLP RALCO VERTICAL DIVISION COLLIMATOR value 003
WITHOUT COLLIMATOR value 004
R503 / R302 MLPI RALCO IRIS COLLIMATOR value 005
The value 004 is used only for the initial phase of the installation
in order to avoid the intervention of alarms (determined by the
absence of the collimator) when the equipment is switched on.
You shall absolutely avoid using this value with the equipment in
normal functioning.

Page 190 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Select the P33 (Enter) push-button to memorize the new value or the P57 or P48 (Reset) push-button
if you do not want to confirm it.

P33 P57 P48

• While one of these buttons is pressed, the value visualised on the “Tilting angle” display will
be the value 000. As soon as the button is released the memorized value will be displayed.

Move the 25S3-Sw1.1 onto OFF to leave the Installation program.

6.24. Further important configuration codes


We suggest to check the following equipment parameter values in order to have a full table
configuration. The parameter values depend on equipment working environmental condition or
operator system uses.

Code 010: select room height.


Code 012: limit tilting counterclockwise (Trendelenburg).
Code 013: limit tilting clockwise.
Code 014: limit the focal distance taking into consideration equipment walls distance (with table at
− 90°).
Code 015: limit the focal distance taking into consideration equipment walls distance (with table at
+ 90°).
Code 049: check the tomography layer correspondence on film.
Code 050: check the DIGITAL tomography layer correspondence. (in case it is available).
Code 075: choose and limit the SFD/column maximum speed during the fluoroscopy function. The
value preset is 001 which means “speed is not limited”. (We suggest value 003 in order to reduce
1.5 speed times the fluoroscopy).
Code 080: select the semiautomatic collimator working mode more suitable for the operator.

Make reference to the adjustment manual 5121726-100 Book 1 in order to set the parameter values.

October 2009 Page 191


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.25. Complete disassembly

NOTE:
Information in this section is for reference only. These steps will not be required during installation

6.25.1. Fitting of the Spot-Film-Device


1) Withdraw Item No. 3 from its packing.

Fig. 88: Item No. 3 – SFD group

2) Insert the SFD in the central bar.


3) Manually verify the proper sliding of the SFD on the bar.
4) Temporarily put the SFD in the middle of the table.

Fig. 89: SFD group

Page 192 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.25.2. Lateral heads


1) Withdraw item No. 4 (Left head - A/Fig. 90) from its packing.
2) Withdraw item No. 5 (Right head - B/Fig. 90) from its packing.

A
B
Fig. 90: Left head and right head

6.25.3. Fitting of the right head


1) Lift the right head next to the central bar Fig. 91.
2) Insert the special draft cord for the cables of the motor and dynamo in the central bar.
3) Insert the right head in the central bar.
4) Partially tighten the two TBEI M10x25screw + flat washer (A/Fig. 92 - Fig. 93).
5) Tighten the screws (Fig. 94): 1 TSEI M10x25 screw
1 TCEI M10x40 screw

Fig. 91: Fitting of the right head

October 2009 Page 193


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Fig. 92 : Fixation of the right bar Fig. 93 : Fixation of the right bar

Fig. 94 : Fixation of the bar

Page 194 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

6.25.4. Fixation of the back bar


Insert the back bar (Fig. 95) in the right head.
Partially tighten the screws indicated in the following figures:
Fig. 96: M6x40 + flat washer
Fig. 97: 1 screw TCEI pos. A M10x20 screw - 2 screws TCEI pos. B M10x25 screw -
2 screws pos. C TBEI M10X40

Fig. 95 : back bar

Fig. 96

Fig. 97 : Fixation of the back bar

October 2009 Page 195


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION
6.25.5. Fitting of the left head
The fitting of the left head is quite the same as the fitting of the right head.

6.25.6. Fitting of the frame


1) Verify that the heads have the squared up position compared with the back and the central
bars.
2) Verify that the chassis is perpendicular by measuring the sides of the rectangular made up by
the back bar and the right and left heads. The measures shall be taken from the front external
part of the left bar and the front external part of the right bar (segment AC), and the back
external part of the left bar and the back external part of the right bar (segment DB).

D B

// 0,80

A C
AC = 2100 ±1 mm
DB = 2100 ±1 mm

3) Verify that the length between the external of the two heads is equal to 2100 ±1 mm.
4) Check if the parallelism between the two headstocks is not more than the tolerance limit of
0,80 millimeters.
5) Screw the heads and the bars by means of the three fixation screws shown in Fig. 972 paying
your attention to the lengths as follows:
6) Fit the cable-holders between the SFD group and the back bar.
7) Insert the cables in the cable-holder.
8) Insert the cables of the SFD and of the dynamo of the SFD transmission in the back bar by
using the specific draft cord.
9) Insert the cables of the SFD and of the dynamo of the SFD transmission in the right head by
using the specific draft cord.
10) Insert the cables of the motor, of the transversal tabletop microswitches and of the SFD’s
transmission potentiometer in the back bar by using the specific draft cord.
11) Insert the cables of the motor and of the transversal tabletop microswitches in the left head by
using the specific draft cord.
12) Insert the SFD’s transmission potentiometer in the central bar by using the draft cord.
13) Fix the cables on both sides of the bar by means of the special threaded rod (Fig. 98).

2
Fig. shows the fixation of the right head; for the fixation of the left head, note that the M10x20 screw is always in the most external position.

Page 196 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

Fig. 98 : Fixation of the cables

14) Fix the cables coming out from the frame by means of the clamps (Fig. 99).

Fig. 99 Fixation of the cables with the clamps

15) Fix the cover of the cable-holder chain by means of the three M4x10 screws (A/Fig. 100).
16) Manually verify the proper sliding of the SFD group.

Fig. 100 : Fixation of the cover of the cables-holder

October 2009 Page 197


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 TABLE INSTALLATION

17) Fit the spot-film-device and fix it to the transmission chain by means of the two M8x40
screws (A/Fig. 101).

Fig. 101 : Fixation of the SFD’s transmission

6.26. Special tools list


Special tools are given on request

Qt Code Description
1 71598 Template for the cassette size calibration
1 44700 Spanner for the frame bearings transversal cassette holder movement adjustment
1 44699 Spanner for the back bearings spot film device carriage adjustment
1 44701 Spanner for the front bearings spot film device carriage adjustment
1 44463 Bush for CD manual motoreductor rotation
1 44464 Bush for manual step by step motor reduction rotation
1 52360 Cable for PC serial input
1 55394 Parallel cable for boards programming

Page 198 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

7. Generator, wall bucky and console installation


7.1. Generator
See section 3.5.1.1 “Transformer tap changes” for power supply adjustment.
The generator cabinet is self standing and does not need to be supported. However, the installation
should meet the following requirements:
• The floor must be flat and level.
• The floor must be capable of supporting a load of approximately 115 kg (250 lbs).
• The generator installation area must be clean and free of dirt or debris.
• Sufficient room must be provided to allow access to the rear and side panels for installation.
Clearance must also be provided at both sides of the cabinet, at the front, and at the rear of the
upper cabinet to allow access for service. See next page for recommended clearances.
• A cable conduit should be provided from the control console to the generator cabinet to allow
routing of the control cable if required. Allow for a 2 inch conduit.
• Refer to E895-02N.doc chap 1C.6.2 for the seismic centre location and for the mounting-hole
locations to secure the generator to the floor, if required.

REAR

M10

300 406

36
85

15 30 455

0.39 (10 mm ) DIA

16.1 (409)
13.9 (353)

TOP
3.3 (85)

VIEW

FRONT
LEVELLING
20.1 (511)
FEET
(4 PLACES)
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES (MM)
SPACERS
FILE: IN_MTG.CDR SUPPLIED BY
CUSTOMER
(4 PLACES)
Fig. 102 fixation on the floor

October 2009 Page 199


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

Fig. 103 clearance


4.5 32.5
1.5
Room interface board;
6 TDI board; GIM
connection; AEC board;
16 32.5 DAP board; Touch screen;
RS232 remote diagnostic

High voltage cables,


6 29 thermal switch, anode.
117 107
8
4

57
Power supply input
3.5 cable (3 phase).

18.5 9

Fig. 104: Generator cabinet (back side). Measure in cm

Page 200 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

7.2. Wall bucky


Before starting the maintenance operations, read carefully the procedure to follow. Keep the working
area clean and dry.

All operations to do on the unit must be carried out when it does not work. The person who is
responsible for the maintenance must completely disconnect the unit, before the adjustment or
replacement of an equipment part.

Keep hands, feet, dresses, jewels and hair at safety distance from any moving part, in order to prevent
any injuries from occurring.

Do not change any part of the unit; changes which are not authorized can compromise the equipment
functioning and safety.

model WS-T model WS

7.2.1. Wall bucky stand overall dimension and center of gravity


The followings drawing show the bucky WS – WS-T center of gravity in their most critical position.
Furthermore the center of gravity doesn't change in lowest or highest bucky position because the
balance weight go down each time you move up the bucky device and as a result the center of gravity
never change.

October 2009 Page 201


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

7.2.1.1. WS wall bucky stand overall dimension and center of gravity

Center of
gravity

Total weight Kg 170

Wall Bucky Stand WS

Page 202 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

7.2.1.2. WS-T wall bucky stand overall dimension and center of gravity

Center of
gravity

Total weight 200Kg

Wall Bucky Stand WS-T

October 2009 Page 203


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION
Model WS
The wall stands are used to make exposures on a bucky. The stand is designed for installation of a
manual or automatic bucky. The bucky can be moved using the vertical carriage in a range from 400
mm to 1765 mm above the floor (center of cassette). The vertical carriage, including bucky, is floating
weight-compensated and is mechanically broken in each position.
The brake grip can be released with one hand while the bucky is moved vertically.
The distance between the wall and the front panel ranges from 390 to 460 mm depending on the
fastening type.

Model WS-T
In addition to the functions described above, the model WS-T, the bucky can be tilted from the vertical
position to the horizontal position (+90°) or to -20°. The distance of the wall-front panel ranges from
650 to 720 mm, depending on the fastening type.

The cassette can be loaded up from different sides, depending on Bucky type:
1) Bucky for cassette size sensing (automatic): the cassette can be loaded up from the left or right
hand side, when ordering we recommend to order for the correct side
2) Bucky for manual collimation: the cassette can be loaded up from the right/or left hand side and
it can be decided also during installation phase

Note
Installation can be made on the wall or can be freely set up in the room using the free-standing kit.
Exposures of standing and sitting patients from the head to the knee.

Option accessories
Bucky with cassette sensing
Floor-wall fastening
Floor base fastening
Arm support
Measure chamber of automatic exposure control

Area of application
Exposures of standing and sitting patients from the head to the knee.

Important note
Proper use of this product requires that operating personnel be familiar with the operating
instructions. They should be carefully studied prior to starting up the equipment.

7.2.2. Required area


The unit is designed for stationary operation. The space required for this is approx. 130 cm x 100 cm.

7.2.3. Room height


The height of the column stand is 223 cm. However, the room height required for installation should
be 230 cm.

7.2.4. Installation
The equipment must be installed and can be maintained only by authorized and trained personnel.
Specifically, they must be informed about the possible dangers caused by improper equipment use and
the residual risks.

Page 204 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

7.2.4.1. Room preparation


This chapter gives useful information to prepare the room where the unit, object of this manual, will be
installed.
According to the rooms dimensions, these information must be observed in order to obtain the unit
complete performance in the best room fitness. Specific information about this are generally given
separately by the manufacturer or the installer, who are in any case at full disposal for any further
needs.

ATTENTION!!!
All masonry works for the room preparation are at customers or installers expense.

It is important to know exactly the room features where the unit will be installed in order to make a
correct preparation, according to the required safety rules as well.

7.2.4.2. Necessary tools for the installation


The equipment mounting does not need specials tools, but common use ones, like those listed below:

1) set of fixed wrenches;


2) set of box wrenches;
3) set of Allen wrenches;
4) set of screwdrivers;
5) water level;
6) electric drilling machine with a set of vidiam drills; diameter 12-14-16

7.2.4.3. Equipment warehousing and moving conditions


Once the unit is assembled in the factory, it is subjected to careful controls and a tests from trained
personnel. After the cleaning, the equipment is packed with corrugated card-board and wrapping paper
(pluriball). For the shipment, the equipment is crated in a case with a wooden bed, walls and cover
millboard of 15mm.. Before the installation, the unit can be kept in the warehouse for some time with
its original packaging. In any case, although every metal part is carefully covered by protection paint
or oxidation superficial treatment, the equipment is not planned to work or be stocked outdoor. It
cannot with stand the humidity; for this reason, do not keep it outdoor or in extreme environment
conditions. It is absolutely forbidden to pass by or under the load during the lifting operations. Make
sure the cases are well fixed during the transport to avoid blows, which could damage their contents.
Pay attention to the moving hanging loads in order to avoid dangers to people or other things. The
cases are made to be lifted through a lifting device (forklift truck). If they must be lifted from the top
(crane), it is necessary to sling them through suitable ropes, which must twine round the case.

October 2009 Page 205


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

7.2.4.4. Equipment receiving


The equipment is contained in a case whose content is briefly listed below. The exact case content is
specified in the Packing List which is attached on the case.

The case dimensions are:

CASE LENGTH WIDTH HEIGTH


233 centimeters 73 centimeters 89 centimeters

The case content is:


The stand (fastened lying down in a horizontal position), complete with bucky carriage (and detection
chamber according to the customer’s requests);
The box contains the small blocks for fixing the wall stand some additional screws, and the optional
accessories to complete the equipment installation and its manuals.

To remove the stand from its crating case, proceed as follows:


Remove the upper cover and the wall cartoon box
Locate the envelope that contains the documents and the assembling instructions and store them
carefully for future use
Take off the box that contains the accessories
Place the stand vertically (in its working position) and proceed as follows: check carefully that all
parts were not damaged during the transport; any kind of damage must be immediately
communicated to the forwarder and the manufacturer.

7.2.4.5. Wall bucky stand case

Page 206 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

7.2.5. Mounting of the wall bucky stand fixation only onto the floor
If the wall bucky stand is the model with a fixation only onto the floor follows the items below:

1) Place the wall bucky stand in a vertical position and move it in its working place.
2) Check very carefully if the wall bucky stand is positioned in the place wanted.
3) Use a pencil to mark 4 holes and point where to fix the wall bucky stand to the floor.
4) By a percussion hammer drill with a widiam bit of D16 make 4 holes 90 mm deeper.
5) To fix the wall bucky stand to the floor use 4 small blocks (standard supplied with the
equipment) D16 – M10 and insert the small blocks without the screw inside the 4 holes
already made on the floor.
6) Re-Place the wall bucky stand in the position decided and insert the 4 small block screws to
fix the wall bucky stand (I) (Fig. 105).
7) During the installation phase is very important to check by a proper level if the wall bucky
stand is perfectly in vertical position.
8) Same adjustment can be made by putting proper shims (standard supplied with the
equipment) between the base plate and the floor ( make reference to the base plate in Fig. 106
bigger base plate).
9) As soon as the installation phase is finished, cover the 4 screws smalls blocks by the 4 black
covering of diameter 30 mm, standard supplied with the equipment, make reference to (L)
Fig. 105.

October 2009 Page 207


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION
Wall bucky stand fixation only onto the floor

Fig. 105: Fixation onto the floor

Page 208 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

Fig. 106: Wallbucky fixation onto the floor

7.2.6. Wallstand fixing onto the wall and floor


On the contrary, if the stand has to be directly fixed to wall and floor, after having fixing the stand to
the floor (make reference to Mounting of the wallstand fixation only onto the floor) it is necessary to
proceed in as follow:

1) Mount the wall bracket to the stand (make reference to (X) Fig. 107) by the two proper screws
M5x6 ((H) Fig. 107).
2) Check if the wallstand is in a perfect vertical position.
3) Through a pencil mark to wall the two fixing holes positions.
4) Move the stand a little away in order to work more easily and make the two holes.
5) Through a percussion drill with a Widiam drill of D12, make 2 holes 70 millimeters deeper in
the wall for the wall bracket fixation.
6) Use two metallic anchor fishers D12-M6 to fix the wall bracket ((L) Fig. 107).
7) The wallstand fixation to the wall by proper wall bracket gives the opportunity to move the
wall stand a little bit to the right or to the left wall side or up-ward and back-ward to be able
to reach a perfect wallstand vertical position.

October 2009 Page 209


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

L
H

Balance weight red screw block


that must be removed A

Fig. 107 Wallbucky fixation onto the floor and the wall

Page 210 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

Fig. 108 Wall bracket

7.2.7. Unblocking of the vertical carriage


Now it is possible to remove the screw, Fig. 105 (A), that tighten the counter balance weight and that
was stopping the wall bucky carriage sliding.

ATTENTION!!!
Proceed carefully to prevent the counterweight (which slides inside the column) from injuring
persons or damaging things, if it is not correctly balanced.

7.2.8. Vertical carriage balancing


The vertical carriage balancing is done in manufacturing with the bucky carriage holder.
The wall bucky stand has a counter weight, which slides inside the column, however, in particular
case, it may be necessary to use an additional counterweight (which is supplied by the manufacturer).
1) Lead the carriage to the low end of travel position;
2) Unscrew the nuts which keep the counterweights;
3) Add the counterweight plates, which are necessary for a good balancing;
4) Fix the nuts on the threaded tie-rods;

October 2009 Page 211


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

7.2.9. Assembling the wall bucky stand covers


(Please make reference to Fig. 105)

To assembly the wall bucky stand covers follows the items below:
Lower cover
1) Move the wall bucky carriage at the higher end of stroke position and lock it by its proper
device
2) Place the lower cover (Fig. 105 (B)) in its proper lowest place, move it in a way that it is
going to fix exactly inside the two screw cover slots
3) Tighten the cover with the two screws TBEI M4x25 (Fig. 105 ( C ), and one screw with the
large rounded headed screw M4 X 10 (Fig. 105 ( D ))

Higher cover
4) Move the carriage wall bucky stand to the lowest end of stroke and lock it by its proper
device4
5) Place the higher cover (Fig. 105 (E)) in its proper higher place, move it in a way that it is
going to fix exactly inside the two screw cover slots
6) Tighten the cover with the two screws TBEI M4x25 (Fig. 105 ( F ), and the screw with the
large rounded headed screw M4 X 10 (Fig. 105 ( D ))

Remember to re-position the top cover (Fig. 105 (G )) by the 2 screws T.S.E.I.M5X16 (Fig. 105 ( H))

GND

Fig. 109: GND cable

Page 212 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

7.3. Console: display and touch screen mounting


For console mounting see previous section 6.6.2 “Control panel”.

115VAC
from I.T.
For
PC;
Video
Splitter;
Monitor; Touch
Modem; screen

Foot
switch

Cable
input
Fig. 110

October 2009 Page 213


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

7.3.1. Spot Film Device and stand group movement reversed (option)

The Spot Film Device and stand group joystick is made with a potentiometer of 10V, thanks to it is
possible to stop the movements in the middle of the stroke (5V with a released joystick)

Usually by tipping the joystick forward the spot film device and stand group move towards the head
side (minimum end of stroke and joystick tension output is going down to 0V), by tipping the joystick
backward the spot film device and stand group will move toward the feet side (the maximum end of
stroke and joystick tension output will increase towards a 10V).

Page 214 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION
In order to reverse the equipment control it is enough to invert the potentiometer power.

1. Open the console mechanically


Remove the positioner control console from the support frame:
unscrew the two front screws and the two back screws based on the related holes. Please
make reference to the following picture for screw and holes locations.

2. Remove both left and right sides of the console.

October 2009 Page 215


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION
3. Using a welder do invert the joystick connection X-1 with X-3 of the spot film device and
stand group

Y
Pin 3

Pin 1

Standard joystick connections

Inverted joystick connections

4. Close mechanically the console


5. Check if the stand and spot film device group movement is reversed
- By tipping the lever forward, the spot film device and stand group will move toward the
feet side.
- By tipping the lever backward the spot film device and stand group will move toward the
head side.

Page 216 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

7.4. Monitor cart

1400mm

660mm

660mm
Single Double

Note: monitor cart ground cable D38 code 56114

October 2009 Page 217


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR, WALL BUCKY AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

Power supply
(code 56111)

Video cable
(code 56112)
1400
mm

660mm
660mm

Ground cable
D38 - cod. 56114

Page 218 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8. Electrical connections
See also cable tables and schematics manual.
Coloured tapes have been added on external cables that are connected during installation to ease
installation work. Colour shall represent the component of destination, that is the part to which cable
shall be connected.

Colour Code for Precision RXi System


COMPONENT COLOUR
Generator cabinet Red
Positioner cabinet Yellow
Table Black
Integrated User Interface Green
Wall Stand n.a.
Overhead Tube Suspension (OTS) Blue
Monitor Suspension/cart Green
Modem Green
Network/Ethernet Green
Power mains board - generator Red
PDU – Positioner/Digital system Yellow
Injector Black

October 2009 Page 219


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.1. Main power supply


The connection to the main power supply is under the customer responsibility.

Description Voltage* Power*


MS1 Main power supply X-Ray generator 400 / 480 VAC (3 phases) 85 / 105 kVA
MS2 Main supply positioner 230 VAC 4 kVA
MS3 Main supply I.T. for digital system 120 / 230 VAC 1 kVA
MS4 Main supply Overhead Tube Suspension 115 / 230 VAC 350 VA

NE1 Ground X-Ray generator


NE2 Ground positioner
NE3 Ground Wall Bucky
NE4 Ground Overhead Tube Suspension

* See properly model.

Tab. ref. --- Description WARNING


G01 MS1 Main power supply X-Ray generator
T01 MS2 Main supply positioner
D01 MS3 Main supply I.T. for digital system These cables are not supplied
C01 MS4 Main supply Overhead Tube Suspension with the systems destined to
G02 NE1 Ground X-Ray generator China; they are purchased
T02 NE2 Ground positioner locally.
W01 NE3 Ground Wall Bucky
C02 NE4 Ground Overhead Tube Suspension

Page 220 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.2. Room electrical connection scheme


8.2.1. Digital version

Ceiling
GMM Stand
Positioner

AEC
Film DAP

I.I. AEC
Power AEC Wall
Camera Bucky
Cabinet

CPU

GIM

RS232 CPI
I.T.

Generator Auxiliary

Monitor
Touch

RS232 Foot
Remote
Diagnostic Switch V.S. RS232
Remote
Modem Diagnostic

Infimed
Digital System Console

Red: Power connections


Green: RS232 connections
Black: Other connections (digital, analog, high voltage …)

October 2009 Page 221


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.2.2. Analogical version

Ceiling
GMM Stand
Positioner

AEC
Film DAP

I.I. AEC
Power Wall
Camera Bucky
Cabinet
I.I.
CPU

Nxx

CPI

Generator Auxiliary

Monitor
Touch

Foot
Switch

Video Outputs
Console

Red: Power connections


Black: Other connections (digital, analog, high voltage …)

Page 222 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.3. Ceiling stand connections

Transformer 230 VAC

ST3

ST1 230 VAC power supply


Main power cabinet MS4
(code 55779) FM528

ST2 Collimator light 150W


(for manual and automatic
collimator version)
Manual collimator version

October 2009 Page 223


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

FM528

Automatic collimator version

Page 224 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Cable paths through the CTM carriage

Cable paths through the CTM carriage

October 2009 Page 225


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Page 226 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Main power cabinet


NE4 (code 55784)

OTS carriage ground Ceiling stand controller panel ground

8.3.1. Ceiling stand housing connections


Thermal switch to generator tank 2 (code 55782)
Wire 5; Wire 6

Anode starter to generator


Tank 2 (code 55786)
wire 1 = common
wire 2 = main
wire 3 = shift

GND to generator tank


GND (code 55783)
See also generator section.
Tube housing Generator tank (tube 2)

High Voltage cables to


generator tank T2
(code 18878)

October 2009 Page 227


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.3.2. Ceiling stand brakes and switches connections

ST3

NOTE:
bridge 2-3
Parking
switches
SC2 pins 8 - 9 to cables J1, J2
OTS ST3 1-4
(code 56194A)

Positioner 25 S3 board (OTS parking position)

Long. parking switch

ST102

Page 228 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Transversal bridge cable support assembly

Directions of the main function cable may vary due to installation requirements. Install as required.
Strip terminal [ST102] serves remote braking and position detector switches.

Long parking switch ST102

Ceiling stand longitudinal parking switch

Parking position: series of two contacts normally opened.

October 2009 Page 229


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Page 230 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

October 2009 Page 231


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.3.3. OTS user interface connections

Page 232 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.3.4. OTS manual collimator connection

M2
M2 pins 3 - 4 to J2
J2 to ST3 pin 5-6
ST3 pin 5-6 to
Generator Room Interface Board
TB4 – TB8 (code 56400)

October 2009 Page 233


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.3.5. Ceiling stand brakes and switches connections (automatic collimator version)

FM457-2C board

Page 234 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

October 2009 Page 235


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Collimator
NOTE:
LED
bridge 2-3

25 S3 SC2 pins 8 – 9
to OTS ST3 1-4
(code 56194A)
Parking switches
cables
Positioner 25 S3 board

ST102

Long. parking switch and


PBL switches
(FFD + PBL zone)

Parcking switch
and FFD switches

Brakes

ST102
FM457-2C

Page 236 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

205 cm
180 cm
100 cm
90 cm

0 cm

Detents position for automatic collimation option PBL (Positive Beam Limitation)

8.3.6. Wall stand cassette presence sensor (automatic collimator version)

FM457-2C to
25 S3 CP13
(code 56427)

25 S3 positioner interface board FM457-2C

October 2009 Page 237


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.3.7. OTS automatic collimator connection (option)

M2

M2 pins 3 - 4 to
OTS J2

Tube 2 indicator
M2 pins 3 - 4 to
Generator room interface board
TB8 / TB4 – pin 2, pin 1
(code 56400)

Page 238 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.3.8. Wall stand cassette dimension detection


OTS 1D
1C
2
2A
1B

2B
3A

2C

Wall
Bucky
1

1A 3B
3

Collimator Generator

1) Cable 1 inside OTS from automatic collimator to FM457-2C board


1A) Collimator AMP connector
1B) Connected to the PCB FM 457-2C interface unit in the OTS trolley
1C) GND cable connected to GND inside OTS
1D) 24 Vac supply cable (inside OTS)

2) Cable 2 inside OTS tube (code 56358B)


2A) Connected to the PCB FM 457-2C interface unit in the OTS trolley
2B) Close to the generator Room Interface Board. CM1 connector 9 pin sub D female
2C) To the generator Room Interface Board. TB3 1-2

3) Cable 3 Wall Bucky connection (code 56357A)


3A) Close to the generator Room Interface Board. CM1 connector 9 pin sub D male
3B) Bucky connector TB1 (already connected)

October 2009 Page 239


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

TB3 1-2

CN1
PCB FM 457-2C interface unit in the OTS trolley room interface board: CN1 - TB3 connector.

Wall Stand TB1 Connector

8.3.8.1. Automatic collimator calibration

For OTS and automatic collimator calibration, make reference to the 5121726-100 book 3 service
manual.

Verify the FFD distances.


Verify the cassettes formats.

Page 240 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.3.9. Vacudap DAP connection

For DAP chamber.


connected to generator DAP
board J3 (code 55993)

October 2009 Page 241


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.4. Wall bucky connections

Remember to remove the lock screw.

8.4.1. Wall bucky with manual collimation version


COMET AEC chamber (code 56282).
Power supply + grid movement (code 56283). Cassette sensor to 25 S3
CP13 board (code 56425)
COMET AEC chamber to GND to
generator AEC board channel 2 main power
(code 56282) cabinet NE3
Power supply + grid movement NE3 (code 56284)
Wall stand
to generator room interface board
TB2 / TB7 / TB10 (code 56283)

230 VAC

Connection
TB11-2 – TB10

Cassette sensor TB1 9-10 to


25 S3 CP13 board
(code 56425)

Power supply + grid movement


to generator room interface board
TB2 / TB7 / TB10 (code 56283)

Page 242 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.4.2. Wall bucky with automatic collimation version (option)


COMET AEC chamber (code 56282).
Power supply + grid movement (code 56283).
Cassette sensor to CM1 D
connector (code 56357A)
COMET AEC chamber to GND to
generator AEC board channel 2 main power
(code 56282) NE3 cabinet NE3
Power supply + grid movement Wall stand (code 56284)
to generator room interface board
TB2 / TB7 / TB10 (code 56283)

230 VAC

Connection
TB11-2 – TB10

Room Interface Board


TB3 1 - 2

Cassette sensor TB1


connector to CM1 D
connector (code 56357A)

Power supply + grid


movement to generator
room interface board
TB2 / TB7 / TB10
(code 56283)

October 2009 Page 243


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

FM457-2C to
25 S3 CP13
(code 56427)

25 S3 positioner interface board FM457-2C

8.4.3. Wall stand with cassette dimension detection configuration


A signal for cassette in (25 S3 B board)

Jumper State Description


JW4 Wall bucky combined with table and ceiling
ON
suspension with manual collimator
Wall bucky combined with table and ceiling
OFF
suspension with automatic collimator

Page 244 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.5. Positioner connections


8.5.1. Power supply and ground
Power supply cables and ground cables must be connected to the cabinet table.

230Vac power supply:


Make sure to respect the instructions specified in Pre-Installation manual “Planning Electrical
Connections”
Connect the cable code 55430 to the 22 Filter
Secure the cables to the structure (cabinet plate) by means of the proper conductive cable-fasteners.

Equipotential node:
Make sure to respect the instructions for the Electrical Power supply
Execute the ground connection with the yellow/green wire having a minimum section of 10 mm2.
Connect ground cable code 55429 to 20GND0.

8.5.2. Positioner power supply (230 V)

To main power cabinet


MS2 230Vac (code 55430)

To main ground cabinet


NE2 (code 55429)

October 2009 Page 245


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Positioner 25 S3 board 25 S4
(for injector option only)

Positioner cabinet

Page 246 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.5.3. Positioner 25 S3 board connections (digital version)

Positioner AMP11 - AMP12 -


AMP13 to generator TDI J6
(code 56380)
Positioner 25 S3 board TDI board

8.5.4. Positioner 25 S3 board connections (analogical 512 TV chain version)

AMP10 to 512 TV chain


AMP1 camera interface
(code 55969)

Positioner 25 S3 board 512 TV chain interface

Positioner 25 S3
AMP11 - AMP12 -
AMP13 to generator
TDI J6
(code 56380)

Positioner 25 S3 board Generator TDI board

October 2009 Page 247


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.5.5. Positioner 25 S3 board connections (analogical TV chain N33 version)

25 S3 positioner board AMP10


to N33 AMP1 interface (code
55969)

Positioner 25S3 board AMP10A


to N33 AMP3 interface
(code 56113)

Positioner 25 S3 board TV chain N33 interface

Positioner 25 S3
AMP11 - AMP12 -
AMP13 to generator
TDI J6
(code 56380)

Positioner 25 S3 board Generator TDI board

8.5.6. Positioner remote diagnostic

CN3 positioner CPU board to


PC COM5 cod (56180)

ATTENTION:
in some PC configurations the
COM serial ports could be different!

Positioner CPU board Digital PC

NOTE: if you choose a different PC COM port, remember to configure properly the GenWare
diagnostic SW.

Page 248 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.5.7. Ceiling stand housing parking position connection

25 S3 board, SC2 pins 8 - 9 (code 56194A)


Switch 2
Make reference to the Ceiling Stand section.

8.5.8. Table X-Ray housing


Thermal switch to generator
tank1 (code 55656)
Wire 5;
Wire 6

Table housing Generator tank (tube 1)


Anode starter to generator
tank 1
(code 55674)
Wire 1=Common
GND to generator GND Wire 2= Main
(code 55202) Wire 3 = Shift

High Voltage cables to


generator tank T1
(code 18875)

Table housing Generator tank (tube 1)

October 2009 Page 249


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.5.8.1. Table housing fan

To generator room control board


TB7 - TB10 230VAC + GND
(code 55673)

8.5.9. Safety for low ceiling extender

Photocell 3CM2 – [3Fc3] above 3CM2 – [3Fc3] to positioner interface


the positioner (code 55279) board 25S3 AMP2 (code 55317)

MAX 400cm

50mm

Photocell Self-Refractive

Page 250 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.5.10. Infimed camera / I.I. connections (digital version)


8.5.10.1. Infimed camera connection

WARNING!
The 100 foot LVDS cable that connects the Precision tower (computer tower) to the camera should
only be plugged in or unplugged while the system is powered off. If this cable is connected or
disconnected while there is power to the system, it is very likely that there will be permanent damage
to the camera and/or the IAPDB.

Camera signals cable to digital PC


(LVDS cable)

Infimed Digital PC
Photo Pick-up camera
Generator AEC interface Board J3
(code 726-795-G1)

Generator AEC board

8.5.10.2. I.I. magnification

Camera I.I. GND to positioner


cabinet – 20GND0
(code 55965)

I.I. magnification and


power supply to
generator room interface
board TB5 (code 56126)

+24
VDC
Image Intensifier Room interface board

October 2009 Page 251


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.5.10.3. I.I. floor safety

I.I. floor safety


(code 55368)

Open the previous


connection and
connect between
points 1 and 2

Page 252 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.5.11. Room double foot switch (option)

3CM20 Room double foot switch


connector to positioner interface board
25S3 AMP5 (code 5662)

Diagnostic Room, Over the


positioner – double foot switch
(code 56363A)

3CM20

AMP5

October 2009 Page 253


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.5.12. Touch Screen remote loudspeaker (option)


Unscrew the two screws on the rear of the positioner and use them to mount the remote loudspeaker.

Connect the cable code 56416 to the rear of the touch screen

Page 254 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.5.13. Remote joystick installation (option)

8.5.13.1. Cover preparation

1) Make 2 holes in the SFD cover in the position shown in the following pictures

Measure in mm

October 2009 Page 255


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
2) Mount the connectors

Cable A

8.5.13.2. Table preparation

3) Tilt the table at 90° and dismount the SFD keyboard protection

Page 256 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
4) Connect the wires to the board following the scheme depicted in the followings pictures

Cables B

Cable A
Connection table: cable A, 7 x 25
Wire color / N. Coming from Terminal type destination Terminal type
White 1 3CM19-1 Soft-solder 3AMP19-1 AMP Contact
Brown 2 3CM19-2 Soft-solder 3AMP19-2 AMP Contact
Green 3 3CM19-3 Soft-solder 3AMP19-3 AMP Contact
Yellow 4 3CM19-4 Soft-solder 3AMP19-4 AMP Contact
Gray 5 3CM19-5 Soft-solder 3AMP19-5 AMP Contact
Pink 6 3CM19-6 Soft-solder 3AMP19-6 AMP Contact

Cable B
Connection table: cable B, 7 x 25
Wire color / N. Coming from AMP Contact destination Terminal type
White 1 3AMP19-1 AMP Contact 3S1-P44A-c Soft-solder
Brown 2 3AMP19-2 AMP Contact 3S1-P44A-no Soft-solder
Green 3 3AMP19-3 AMP Contact 3S1-P44C-no Soft-solder
Yellow 4 3AMP19-4 AMP Contact 3S1-P44B-c Soft-solder
Gray 5 3AMP19-5 AMP Contact 3S1-P44B-no Soft-solder
Pink 6 3AMP19-6 AMP Contact 3S1-P44D-no Soft-solder

October 2009 Page 257


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

5) Mount the keyboard protection

Page 258 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

October 2009 Page 259


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Bianco = White
Marrone = Brown
Verde = Green
Giallo = Yellow
Grigio = Gray
Rosa = Pink

Page 260 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.5.13.3. Cable connections


6) Mount the SFD keyboard protection
7) Connect the AMP connectors before mounting the Image Intensifier cover.

Cover board

8) Mount and connect the joystick to the II cover connector

October 2009 Page 261


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.5.13.4. Spot Film Device and stand group tilting control

WARNING:
On request of the equipments operator, it is possible to reverse the SFD and column movement by
modifying the cabling of the console on the table harvests. Make reference to the following procedure
in order to do this.

The remote joystick for spot film device and stand group movement is made by two switches that stop
the spot film device and stand group movement as soon as the lever is released

Usually by tipping the cloche lever forward, the spot film device and stand group will move toward the
head side (minimum end of stroke), by tipping the cloche lever backward, the spot film device and
stand group will move toward the feet side (maximum end of stroke)

To reverse the table control it is enough to invert the switches .

1. Remove the covers from the spot film device


2. Invert the connection on the female connector 3AMP19 (pin2 – brown wire with pin3 – green
wire)

Or:
1. Open the joystick
2. Invert the connection on the output of the push buttons P44A and P44C (brown wire with -
green wire)

Standard joystick connections

Page 262 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Joystick connections inverted in the spot film device

Joystick connection inverted in the joystick

3. Reassemble the covers of the joystick and the spot film device
4. Check that the spot film device and stand group movement is reversed.
5. By tipping the cloche lever forward, the spot film device and stand group will move toward
feet side
6. By tipping the cloche lever backward, the spot film device and stand group will move toward
head side

October 2009 Page 263


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.6. Analogical 512 TV chain connections (analogical version only)


If you do not have this version please go to the next paragraph.

56112

55966

56176A
55969
55968

Analogical 512 TV chain interface (inside positioner cabinet)

Page 264 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.6.1. Analogical 512 TV chain: camera connection

GND to positioner cabinet


(code 55965)

Camera video signal output


to 512 TV chain interface
(code 55966)

October 2009 Page 265


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.6.2. Analogical 512 TV chain: camera to I.I. magnification connection

AMP2 to I.I connector


(code 55968)

8.6.3. Camera 512 to positioner connection

512 TV interface AMP1 to


positioner
25 S3 board AMP10
(code 55969)

Page 266 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.6.4. Camera 512 to generator connection

SC1 24 VDC power supply and


ABS to room interface board
TB7 - TB8 24VDC and to
TDI J7 pins 1-2-3 (code 56176A)

ABS contacts

8.6.5. Analogical 512 TV chain to monitor power supply connection

512 panel MV1 230 VAC


power in from generator
room interface board
TB7 – TB10 (code 55967)

Positioner cabinet
MV1 220 VAC out
monitor
power supply
(code 56111)

October 2009 Page 267


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.6.6. Camera 512 to monitor video signal connection

Positioner cabinet
video out
(code 56112)

8.6.7. Camera 512 and cart

Power supply
(code 56111)

1400mm

Video cable
(code 56112)

660mm 660m
660mm
Ground cable
D38 - code 56114

Page 268 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.7. Analogical TV chain N33 camera connections (analogical version only)


If you do not have this version please go to the next paragraph.

55968

56090
56112 56112
56406

56176A
56402
56403
56401

56113 55969

October 2009 Page 269


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

New camera
interface board
code 56109A

Camera head

Camera power supply

Flat cable
Camera board
Sync 56406

TV chain SC1 24 VDC TDI J4D 56402


power supply to Room
Interf. Board TB7/TB8 TDI J2 56403
(code 56176A)
TDI J4C 56401
N33 AMP2 to II connector
(code 55968)

N33 AMP3 to positioner N33 AMP1 to positioner


25S3 AMP10A 25S3 AMP10
(code 56113) (code 55969)

Page 270 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Camera board
power supply

Flat cable

8.7.1. Camera N33 to generator connection

TV chain panel MV1 230


VAC to Room Interf. Board
TB7-TB10 (code 55967)

TV chain SYNC to
camera board SYNC
(code 56406)

October 2009 Page 271


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

0V24
ABS contacts
ABS

SYNC

TV chain SC1 ABS to


TDI J7 pins 1-2
(code 56176A)

TV chain SC1 24 VDC power


supply to Room Interf. Board
TB7/TB8 (code 56176A)

8.7.2. Analogical TV chain N33 camera connection

TV chain N33 camera video


signal (code 56090)

GND to positioner cabinet


(code 55965)

Page 272 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.7.3. Camera to positioner connection

N33 AMP3 interface to


Positioner 25S3 board AMP10A
(code 56113)

N33 AMP1 interface to


Positioner 25S3 board AMP10
(code 55969)

8.7.4. Analogical TV chain N33 camera to I.I. magnification connection

N33 AMP2 to I.I


connector (code 55968)

October 2009 Page 273


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.7.5. Analogical TV chain N33 - Generator TDI connection

J2

N33 J4D to TDI J4D


(code 56402)

N33 J2 to TDI J2 J4C


(code 56403)

N33 J4D to TDI J4C J4D


(code 56401)

8.7.6. Generator - Positioner connection (N33 analogical version)

Positioner 25 S3
AMP11 - AMP12 -
AMP13 to generator
TDI J6
(code 56380)
Positioner 25 S3 board Generator TDI board

Page 274 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.7.7. Analogical TV chain N33 power supply and video signals (analogical version only)
When using this camera (1kx1k) with coaxial connection you must insert a filter switching the switch
as shown below:

October 2009 Page 275


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Monitor Video signal live


230 VAC for monitor n. 2
monitor n. 1 (code 56112)
and monitor n. 2
(code 56111) Video signal live
monitor n.1
(code 56112)

Positioner cabinet, TV chain panel

TV chain panel MV1 230


VAC power in from generator
room interface board
TB7 – TB10 (code 55967)

Page 276 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

October 2009 Page 277


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Ground cable
D38 - cod. 56114

Page 278 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.8. GIM Connections

GIM P1 – P4 to P15 Null modem to


generator TDI digital PC (735-371-G1)
J4A-J4B-J4C-J4D-J4F P16 Serial Port0 to
(J4A = 726-619-G1 = P1)
Touch Screen COM2
(J4B = 726-619-G2 = P2) (code 56181)
(J4C = 726-619-G3 = P3)
(J4D = 726-619-G4 = P4) P18 Drive Output to
(J4F = 726-619-G6 = P6) generator TDI board
PFL J7 pins 3-4
Port1-P3, Port2-P2 (code 726-654-G1)
Port1-P2 to
generator TDI J1-J2-J3
P20 ABS to
(P2 port1 = 726-618-G1 = J3) Generator TDI board
(P2 port2 = 726-618-G2 = J2) ABS J7 pins 1-2
(P3 port1 = 726-618-G3 = J1) (code 726-654-G1)

Power supply
from I.T.
(code 068-113)

GIM board is placed into the positioner cabinet

8.8.1.1. GIM board connectors scheme

GIM left side connectors

GIM right side connectors

October 2009 Page 279


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.8.1.2. GIM connection details


GIM Null Modem Digital PC
(code 735-371-G1) (code 735-371-G1)

P16 Serial Port0 to


Touch Screen COM2
P17 P16 P15 (code 56181)
Port 2 Port 0 Pay attention to the Touch
Port 3 Port 1 RJ45 Screen parameters!

GIM P18 PFL

GIM P20 ABS

Generator
TDI board J7
ABS and
pulsed fluoro
(code 726-654-G1)

Power supply
to I.T.
(positioner cabinet)
(code 068-113)

Page 280 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Port1-P3, Port2-P2 Port1-P2 to


generator TDI J1-J2-J3
(P2 port1 = 726-618-G1 = J3)
(P2 port2 = 726-618-G2 = J2)
(P3 port1 = 726-618-G3 = J1)

P1 – P4 to generator TDI
J4A-J4B-J4C-J4D-J4F
(J4A = 726-619-G1 = P1)
(J4B = 726-619-G2 = P2)
(J4C = 726-619-G3 = P3)
(J4D = 726-619-G4 = P4)
(J4F = 726-619-G6 = P6)

GIM left side connectors

PF ABS TABLE

J6 J10
J7 J11
J1
3
J2 2
1
J3

Generator
TDI 2 F
C
board D
J4
A
B

October 2009 Page 281


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.9. Generator connection


8.9.1. Cables path

Room interface board;

TDI board; GIM


connection; AEC board;
DAP board; Touch screen;
RS232 remote diagnostic

High voltage cables,


thermal switch, anode.

Power supply input


cable (3 phase).

Page 282 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Power supply input cable


(3 phase) and GND.

October 2009 Page 283


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.9.2. Power connection

R S T Neutral

Main ground NE1


(code 56360)

Main power supply MS1


(code 56359) Noise generated by the
relay K2 contacts filter

Page 284 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.9.3. Generator – Positioner / GIM interface (TDI 2)

PF ABS TABLE

J6 J10
J7 J11
J1
3
J2 2
1
J3

Generator
TDI 2 F
C
board D
J4
A
B

TDI 2 connectors scheme

TDI board J6 to positioner 25 S3


AMP11 - AMP12 - AMP13 Positioner 25 S3 board
(code 56380)

PFL

Generator TDI board


ABS / pulsed fluoro J7
to GIM P18 – P20
(code 726-654-G1) ABS GIM

October 2009 Page 285


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

generator TDI J1-J2-J3 to


GIM Port1-P2, Port1-P3 Port 2-P2
(P2 port1 = 726-618-G1 = J3)
(P2 port2 = 726-618-G2 = J2)
(P3 port1 = 726-618-G3 = J1)

generator TDI J4A-J4B-J4C-J4D-J4F


to GIM P1 – P4
(J4A = 726-619-G1 = P1)
(J4B = 726-619-G2 = P2)
(J4C = 726-619-G3 = P3)
(J4D = 726-619-G4 = P4)
(J4F = 726-619-G6 = P6)

TDI board GIM

GIM left side connectors

TDI board

Page 286 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.9.4. Generator AEC chambers


To COMET chamber AEC J1
positioner (code 55844)
To COMET chamber AEC J2
Wall bucky (code 56282)

AEC board J3 to Photo Pick-up


camera (digital version)
(code 726-795-G1)

Infimed Camera

Photo Pick-up Infimed camera to


generator AEC interface Board J3
(code 726-795-G1)

8.9.4.1. Generator and DSA option (digital version only)

AEC board J3 to Photo Pick-up


camera (digital version)
(code 726-795-G1)

Bridge for DSA calibration


J3 – 4 with J4 – 4
J3 – 7 with J4 – 7
J3 – 12 with J4 – 12

October 2009 Page 287


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.9.5. Generator DAP chambers

To J2 – channel 1: To J3 – channel 2:
positioner DAP ceiling stand DAP
(code 40358) (code 55993)

positioner DAP
positioner DAP connector

Page 288 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.9.6. Generator – X-Ray housings

Positioner TUBE 1
X-Ray housing To positioner X-Ray housing
Anode H-Voltage thermal switch (code 55656)
(Tube 1 code 18875)
To positioner X-Ray housing
anode starter (code 55674)

TUBE 1 GND (code 55202)

TUBE 2
TUBE 2 GND (code 55783)

Ceiling stand Ceiling stand X-Ray housing


X-Ray housing thermal switch (code 55782)
anode H-Voltage
(Tube 2 18878) Ceiling stand X-Ray housing
anode starter (code 55786)

Thermal switch to generator tank 2


(code 55782)
Wire 5
Wire 6

GND to generator tank Anode starter to generator


GND (code 55783) Tank 2 (code 55786)
Wire 1= common
Tube Wire 2 =main
Anode-cathode Wire 3= shift

October 2009 Page 289


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.9.7. Remote diagnostic connections

Remote diagnostic: CPU


board J15 RS-232 serial
port to PC COM4
(code 56182)

NOTE: if you choose a different PC COM port, remember to configure properly the GenWare
diagnostic SW.

8.9.8. Touch screen signals

Generator interface board J4 to


touch screen J2 (data link)
(code 739772 01)

touch screen GND


(code 736676-01)
Room Interface board - GND

Page 290 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.9.9. Generator – Room interface board

TB7 TB8 TB9 TB10


0V (GND) + 24VDC 110 VAC 230VAC

TB2 Wall bucky

TB5 I.I. Magnification (digital version)

• Touch Screen GND (code 736676-01)


• Wall bucky 230 VAC (code 56283)
• Positioner I.I. magnification (digital version) (code 56126)
• Positioner housing fan power supply 230VAC (code 55673)
• Positioner MV1 - Monitor LCD/ N22 / N23 230V (analogical version) (code 55967)
• 512 camera SC1 24 VDC power cable (analogical version) (code 56176A)
• External Room Light and Interlock Room Door

I.I magnification connections detail:

TB5: to positioner I.I.


Magnification cable
(code 56126)

To TB8 +24 VDC


room interface board

October 2009 Page 291


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.10. Injector connection (optional)

25 S3 board
Positioner
Positioner
Injector Cabinet

56442
56443 56420
56444 P1 3S1 AMP1 AMP1 25 S4
board
GND 56453 GND
AMP2
56431
GND

TDI

J10
Generator
J11
J1
3 Connections
56421 between
J2 2 25 S4 AMP2 25 S3 board
and 25 S4 board
J3 1

Injector connection scheme

Injector GROUND
cable connection
(code 56453)

Injector signal
cable connection
(code 56442)
(code 56443)
(code 56444)

To 25 S4 board
(code 56420)
(code 56431 GND)

Page 292 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.10.1. 25 S4 injector interface board

AMP1

For 25 S3 board
connection

AMP2
25 S4 board frontal view 25 S4 board lateral view

25 S3 board: injector board interface enable / disable jumper JW3.

Jumper State Description


JW3 ON Injector interface NOT present
OFF Injector interface present

October 2009 Page 293


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.11. Console connection


8.11.1. Power supply

Console power 110 VAC


distribution from
Isolation Transformer
(code 56184)

To video splitter 9 VDC


(code 56226)

8.11.2. Console monitor connections

Monitor SVGA signals


to PC SVGA board (or video
splitter) (code 56209)

Console monitor transformer


power connection to console
110VAC distribution
(code 56218)

Page 294 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.11.3. Video splitter connections (digital version)

SVGA video input (56210)


9VDC power input
(code 56226) SVGA video n.1
output (code 56209)
SVGA video n.2
output (code 56207)

PC Ceiling Monitor Suspension Ground cable


D38 - 56114
56207

I.T. 110VAC
56120
Video splitter 56120 I.T. 110VAC
LAN
Input Output 1 Output 2
56207 Console Monitor

56209

COM 4 COM5
56226

GIM 56218
Transformer
56210
56184

October 2009 Page 295


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.11.4. Double monitor cart connections

SVGA video
(code 56209)

Ground cable
D38 - cod. 56114

Page 296 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.11.5. Modem connections (digital version)

COM1 - 56216
56240
56234

Modem
LAN

COM Phone Line

COM4 COM5 56224 Transformer


56218

GIM

56184

October 2009 Page 297


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.11.6. Touch screen connections

GND to generator room interface board


(code 736676-01)

Touch screen RS232 COM2 to GIM


GIM Serial port 0 (code 56181)

J2 communication signals to generator CPU


main board J4 (code 739772 01)

J3 spot hand switch to console


positioner keyboard (code 56183)
Console

Page 298 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.11.7. Console keyboard connections

Positioner cabinet transformer 22


TR2 pin 27 - 28 to console keyboard
power supply (code 55366)

J3 spot hand switch to console


positioner keyboard (code 56183)

CP1 to foot switch


(code 55217)

AMP1 to positioner cabinet 25


S3 board AMP4 (code 55232)

Console keyboard power supply to


positioner cabinet transformer 22
TR2 pin 27 - 28 (code 55366)
GND to positioner cabinet RS232 – Positioner CPU
22GND0 (code 55415) Optical fibre (code 56365)
Console positioner keyboard

October 2009 Page 299


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

RS232 – positioner CPU


Optical fibre (code 56365)

CP1 to foot switch


(code 55217)

AMP1 to positioner cabinet 25 S3


board AMP4 (code 55232)

handswitch J3 to
console positioner
keyboard
(code 56183)

Page 300 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.12. Digital PC connections


8.12.1. I.T. power supply

Power supply outputs to:


N.2 monitor suspension (56120), GIM (code 068-113),
and console power distribution connection (56184: digital
PC, console monitor, video splitter, modem)

Power supply input


to main power input
MS3 (code 56119)

8.12.2. Digital PC

Console power distribution 115 VAC (56218)

Infimed camera signals LVDS


Plug in or unplug while the system is powered off!

GND cable connection (code 56467)


Trackball (56230) and keyboard (code 56228)
PC COM1 for modem connection (code 56216)
Ethernet / DICOM port (code 56232)
Reference monitor SVGA signal (code 56207)
PC DVI (code 88741-8000-012)
PC COM4 to generator CPU board J15 for remote
diagnostic Genware (code 56182)
PC COM5 to positioner remote diagnostic CN3 for
GMM Terminal (code 56180)

Digital PC to GIM Null Modem RJ45 (735-371-G1)


PC DVI (code 88741-8000-012)
Direct monitor SVGA signal to video splitter or
to LCD monitor (code 56210)
88741-8000-012 ATTENTION:
in some PC configurations the COM4 / COM5
serial ports could be exchanged between them!
Another PC cabinet …

October 2009 Page 301


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

PC DVI (code 88741-8000-012)

Reference monitor SVGA signal (code 56207)

Infimed camera signals LVDS


Plug in or unplug while the system is powered off!

WARNING:
For some PC hardware the COM serial ports could have different position and different COM
number. Please pay attention in order to configure the correct port number for the remote diagnostic
programs (GenWare and GMM Terminal).

Page 302 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.12.3. Digital PC ground cable

GND cable (code 56467)

October 2009 Page 303


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.12.3.1. Camera connection

WARNING!
The 100 foot LVDS cable that connects the Precision tower (computer tower) to the camera should
only be plugged in or unplugged while the system is powered off. If this cable is connected or
disconnected while there is power to the system, it is very likely that there will be permanent damage
to the camera and/or the IAPDB.

Camera signals LVDS

8.12.3.2. Remote diagnostic connection


PC DVI
(code 88741-8000-012)

Remote diagnostic: CPU board


J15 to PC COM4 (code 56182) Remote diagnosticCN3 to PC
COM5 (code 56180)
ATTENTION:
in some PC configurations the
COM serial ports could be different! ATTENTION:
in some PC configurations the
COM serial ports could be different!

Generator CPU board Positioner CPU board

Page 304 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.13. Intercommunication system connection (option)

Microphone and loudspeaker

Positioner Positioner
cabinet

Console
Cod. 55510

230 Vac
Cod. 55513

Supplier /
Amplifier
Cod. 56297 Cod. 56296

Microphone Loudspeaker
Remote T O O R + A

230 V A B U U X X T O R + A

Console 2 1 1 2 A B U U
Microphone Loudspeaker
Power supplier / amplifier detail

October 2009 Page 305


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
1) Mount the loudspeaker and the microphone on the console

2) Mount the loudspeaker amplifier into the positioner cabinet

Power
Supply
screw

230 Vac

Cod. 55513

Page 306 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
3) Mount the room loudspeaker on the positioner

cable

screw
screw

October 2009 Page 307


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
4) Mount the room microphone on the positioner collimator

5) Use the same cable covers of the collimator and DAP

Page 308 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
6) Connect the microphone cable on the back of the column

Cable route

7) Connect all the cable with the amplifier in the positioner cabinet

October 2009 Page 309


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.14. External room light and interlock room door

Page 310 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.15. Configuring the overlay for NTSC system

ATTENTION!
This procedure is applicable only if the PlatinumOne digital system by Infimed is provided with the
“ClinicalApp” version 2007.12.14.02 (or further versions) software.

ATTENTION!
You shall execute this optional procedure only if especially requested by the final customer and only
on systems meant for countries where an external NTSC video recorder (VCR) is used.

8.15.1. Introduction
Should you need to record image sequences under TV format on the external DVD video recorder
(Sony DVD recorder), you shall eliminate a certain number of lines of the radiological image so as to
avoid any incompatibility problem coming from the video signal formats.
In order to avoid an excessive image degradation, the lines to be eliminated are preferably chosen in
the upper part and lower part of the image itself that is, exactly the areas where the patient name and
other data are usually entered in text modality.
The NTSC standard provides for a lower number of TV lines compared to the PAL system and
consequently with the NTSC TV Record it is not possible to reread this text information correctly.
This is the reason why a patch has been released allowing you to modify the position of this text
(overlay) by positioning it towards the centre of the image.

The following (optional) procedure ensures the installation of a preferred overlay type: either A) or
B):

A) the preset overlay (PAL) type: having text written externally to the image (either higher or
lower);
B) the NTSC type having text written more internally to the image (either less higher or less
lower).

1) You shall select “Shutdown” in the Start menu;


2) You shall select the Shutdown line in the drop menu of the Shutdown dialog window (the
system will be completely disconnected and switched off)
3) Switch on again your PC: while the system is re-starting you shall hold the left <Shift> key
(on the keyboard) pressed: the system will prompt you to enter your User Name and
Password.
4) Enter the ServiceApp application with the proper Password;
5) The ServiceApp application will be started automatically.
6) You shall then exit the ServiceApp application and quit the ClinicalApp application as well.

Please make sure that no application is running before continuing to section 8.15.2.

October 2009 Page 311


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.15.2. Installing the NTSC overlay patch


1) You shall insert the “Software installation CD” inside the CD/DVD drive;
2) Right click with the mouse on the Windows “Start” button and then click on the
“Explore” line in the pop-up window.
3) In the left side folder navigation window of Windows Explorer: double-click on D: CD
Drive to open it.
4) In the right side of the window area you shall localize and double click on the
“NTSC_Overlay_Patch” to open it:

5) In the right side of the window area you shall double-click on the “setup.exe” file to run the
installation program.
6) When the InstallShield “Welcome” screen appears, click on the “Next” key to
continue.
7) When the InstallShield “Start Copy Files” window appears, double click on the “Next”
key to continue.
8) When the prompt for the type of overlay to be installed appears, make sure that the “NTSC
adjusted overlays” option is selected and click on the key to continue.
9) Once the installation is complete, click on the key.
10) You shall now switch off the system and restart it so that the new overlay file can be
downloaded in the IAPDB/IAPDB-MF Board.

Page 312 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

8.15.3. Removing the NTSC overlay patch


ATTENTION !
You shall execute the present procedure only if the NTCS overlay patch was installed by mistake and
you want to restore the installation of the preset overlay fitting VCRs of the PAL type.

1) Insert the “Software installation CD” in the CD/DVD drive.


2) Right click on the Windows “Start” button and then click on the “Explore”
line in the pop-up window.
3) In the left side folder navigation window of Windows Explorer, you shall double click on
D: CD Drive to open it.
4) In the right side of the window area you shall localize and double click on the
“NTSC_Overlay_Patch” folder to open it.
5) In the right side of the window area, you shall double click on the “setup.exe” file to run the
installation program.
6) When the InstallShield “Welcome” screen appears, you shall select the “Repair” option and
click on the “Next” key to continue.
7) When the prompt for the type of overlay to be installed appears, you shall make sure that the
“Default overlays” option is selected and then click on the “Next” key to
continue.
8) Once the installation is complete, you shall click on the “Finish” key.
9) At this point you must switch off the system and restart it so that the new overlay files can be
downloaded in the IAPDB/IAPDB-MF Board.

October 2009 Page 313


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9. Digital PC configuration
Technical notes to update programs and other installations on the digital PC

WARNING
To install new program and change PC configuration parameter is necessary to be an
“administrator” user. Remember to log in with the user name “serviceapp” (and with the
appropriate password).

If the auto log-in process is enabled hold down the shift key during the start up process to have the
log-in window.

*****

Page 314 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.1. Windows auto log-in function configuration

ATTENTION:
Windows auto log-in function should be already disabled.
The following procedure must be done in case it is necessary to update the digital system.
At windows start up, in case the system does not show the log in mask, please perform the following
procedure in order to disable the auto log in function.

WARNING!
If the automatic log-in procedure is activated, it will not be possible to make any remote diagnostic
activities. As a matter of fact, all the diagnostic programs can be started only from “administrator”
users. As a result, a remote user interested in remote diagnostic, must log-out the user “operator” in
order to be able to log-in as a “serviceapp” user. This last procedure step is disabled in case of the
Auto log-in functioning.

Open up the control panel window by the following steps:

1) Click start button


2) Select Settings function, control Panel
3) From control panel window start the “User and Password” program

October 2009 Page 315


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

4) Select the check box:


User must enter a user name and password to use the computer
As a result, users list will be activated.

5) Select the user “operator”


6) Press the button “Set Password …” in order to re-set the password for this user
Set password windows will be activated.

7) Just click the button, in order to obtain an empty password for the user “operator”.
In other words, as soon as the log-in mask opens up, the user “operator” will be able to work
with the computer simply by selecting the “OK” button (no password needed).

Page 316 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.2. Local Network (LAN) configuration


9.2.1. DHCP vulnerability
9.2.1.1. Introduction
This advisory applies to all Infimed digital imaging systems based on the Windows 2000 operating
system that are configured to acquire IP Configuration information via the DHCP Client service.

This advisory is based on Microsoft Security Bulletin MS06-036:


there is a remote-code-execution vulnerability in the DHCP Client service that could allow an
attacker who successfully exploited this vulnerability to take complete control of the affected system.

A remote code execution security issue has been identified in the DHCP Client service that could
allow an attacker to remotely compromise a Windows-based system and gain control over it.

9.2.1.2. Solution
The DHCP client service is not critical to the functions of the imaging system. It is, however, critical
to the system network connection used for DICOM functionality. In order to address the security
concerns presented by the DHCP Client vulnerability, the DHCP Client service must be disabled. To
maintain DICOM capability, the IP Configuration information must be manually set in the Windows
Network Properties. The following instructions will detail these processes

9.2.1.3. Disable DHCP client service

WARNING!
Do disable the DHCP service only if the customer has not decided to use it for his local area network
management.

NOTE:
Disabling the DHCP Client requires administrator-level privileges to the operating system. Steps 1-4
provide admin-level logon instructions; the remaining steps detail DHCP Client service operation.

1) Power up the digital imaging system. As the system boots, hold down the <SHIFT> key to
interrupt auto-logon and allow for administrator logon.
2) Replace the ‘operator’ user name with the admin-level user ‘serviceapp’. The user name is
case-sensitive.
3) Type the correct password in the password field. The password is case-sensitive.
4) Click the OK button or press <ENTER>. The ‘serviceapp’ user account starts the Service
Application automatically.
5) Close the Service Application. The Clinical Application will start automatically.
6) Close the Clinical Application. This will provide un-impeded access to the Windows
desktop.
7) At the Windows desktop, right-click on the My Computer icon and select Manage from the
menu.

October 2009 Page 317


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

8. On the left side of the System Management window, expand the Services and Applications
category and select the Services line.

Left-click the ‘+’ sign to


expand the category.
Left-click on the Services
item to populate the right side
of the window.

9. Locate and double-click on the DHCP Client service in the list of installed services.

Double-click the DHCP Client service to access the


DHCP Client Properties window.

Page 318 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION
10. Use the Stop button to terminate the service. When complete, the Service Status should
reflect “Stopped”.
11. Use the drop-down menu to set the service Startup Type to “Disabled”.

12. Click on the Apply button to commit the changes, and click the OK button to close the
window.

…and that the Startup type


is Disabled (Step 11).
Note the service is
Stopped (Step 10)…

Click Apply to save the


changes, then OK to close
the window (Step 12).

13. Verify that the Services list in the Computer Management window updates with the new
DHCP Client information.

Note that the status


field is blank…

…and the service is


Disabled.

14. Close the Computer Management window.

October 2009 Page 319


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.2.2. Configure network IP settings

To perform this step it is necessary to know the IP address and subnet mask. This information must
be requested to the Network administrator where the equipment will be installed.

Select the “My network places” program .


1) Push the right mouse button side
2) The window Menu will appear in
3) Select “Properties” option function from the menu

4) In the Network and Dial-up window select “Local Area Connection”


5) Open the Menu by pushing the right mouse button side
6) Select again “Properties” function

Page 320 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION
7) Click the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”
8) Click once again “Properties” button
9) Insert ONLY the following information:

IP address
Subnet mask
Make reference to the next example

WARNING!
IP address and subnet mask must be requested to the Network administrator where the equipment will
be installed.

10) Save the data previously set, by pushing the OK button


11) Restart the PC.

October 2009 Page 321


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.2.3. LAN activity check


1) Click start button
2) Select Programs function, then Accessories
3) Select Command Prompt program

4) On the command line type ping followed by a known accessible IP address (in the example
192.168.0.155).
5) If the network is working the reply is showed in the next figure.

Page 322 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.3. Windows 2000 Professional updating

The par. 9.3 listed modifications are necessary, but they can be updated anytime.
It is important, from time to time, to verify if new patches are present on the Microsoft Windows
Update web site.

9.3.1. Enabling the internet access through the hospital network

It is very important to enable the access to internet only for the time necessary to perform Windows
Update and to disable the access immediately after the completion of this procedure.
DO NOT leave internet access enabled!

1) Double click on “My Network Place”, select the “Local Area Connection”, right click on it
and select “Properties”. In the Properties windows select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” and
click on the “Properties” button in order to reach the following windows (or follow the steps
described in the par. 9.2 page 317)

192 . 168 . 0 . 254

192 . 168 . 0 . 244

2) Add the proper value for the parameters “Default gateway” and “Preferred DNS server”.
These parameters are user site dependent.
3) Save the Data by pushing the OK button. Now it will be possible to reach Internet through the
hospital network.

Remember to disable Internet access immediately after the completion of this procedure!

October 2009 Page 323


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.3.2. Executing Microsoft Internet Explorer for the first time

1) Double click on the Internet Explorer icon (placed on the desktop)


2) If this is the first execution of the program, a connection configuration wizard will start.
3) Select “I want to set up my Internet connection manually, …”, and click “Next”.

3) Select “I connect through a local area network (LAN)”, and click “Next”.

4) Select “I connect through a local area network (LAN)”, and click “Next”.
5) Click “Next” also for the successive windows (Automatic discovery …).

Page 324 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION
6) Select “No”, you do not need to set up an Internet mail account, and click “Next”.

7) Click “Finish” to complete the connection wizard.

October 2009 Page 325


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.3.3. Microsoft Internet Explorer configuration


1) When Microsoft Internet Explorer is running select the menu “Tools” and “Internet Option”.
2) Select “General” tab and press the button “Use Blank”. This will prevent unwanted web pages
accesses.
3) Press “Apply” and close the window pressing the “OK” button

Page 326 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.3.4. Access the Windows Update web site


1) While Microsoft Internet Explorer is running, select the “Tools” menu and then “Windows
Update” option.

9.3.5. Upgrade the “Windows Update” program


2) When the “Security window” asks you if you want to update your local “Windows Update”
program, click on “Yes” and the new program revision will be installed.

October 2009 Page 327


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION
3) When “Windows Update” program is updated, the following windows appears:

4) Select the “Custom” button and “Yes” for the following information message.

5) Then wait for your computer analysis.

Page 328 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION
6) It may happen that the new version of “Windows Update” needs some patches …
You shall press the “Download and Install Now” button.

7) At the end of this process, you shall restart your computer to ensure the updates take effect.

October 2009 Page 329


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.3.6. Update Windows Operating System


1) After rebooting, please run Internet explorer / Windows update (make reference to the par.
9.3.4) and press the “Custom” button.

2) In the left frame you will see the following selections (under “Select by Type”).
High Priority (nn)
Software, Optional (nn)
Hardware, Optional (nn)

3) Click on the “High Priority” link.


4) In the right frame, uncheck ALL the Windows Service Packs found by clicking on the square
checkbox (Do Not install ANY Windows service packs!).
It is possible to install the Internet Explorer Service Pack. This is not a Windows Operating
System Service Pack and than you can select it (do not unselect the square checkbox).

checkbox

Page 330 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION
5) You can install also all the Microsoft.Net service packs.
6) Click on the “Review and install updates” link near the top of the right frame.
7) Click on the “Install Now” button to start the installation.

8) Accept the End User License Agreement (EULA).

October 2009 Page 331


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION
9) Wait for software installation.

10) Press “OK” when Windows asks you if you want to restart the computer.

11) After the PC will be restarted, run again all these steps in order to verify if new patches are
found. See the following picture as an example. Repeat these steps until you will not have any
new patch in the “Critical Updates and Service packs” windows.
(Remember: do not install any Windows Operating System Service Pack, “Software,
Optional” patches, or “Hardware Optional” patches.)

Remember to disable Internet access immediately after the completion of this procedure!
Delete the parameters “Default gateway” and “Preferred DNS server” from the Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) Properties windows (see 9.3.1).

Page 332 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.4. Genware and GMM_Terminal COM ports configuration

ATTENTION:
Genware and GMM_Terminal COM ports should be already configured.
Perform this procedure in order to verify the configuration only.

9.4.1. Genware COM port configuration


Run Genware program
1) Press the “Start” button
2) Select Programs, GenWare Utilities
3) Click on GenWare Generator Utilities

4) Press the COM button


5) Select the serial port COM4 and press OK.

6) Exit from the program

WARNING:
For some PC hardware the COM serial ports could have different position and different COM
number. Please pay attention in order to configure the correct part number for the remote diagnostic
programs (GenWare and GMM Terminal).

October 2009 Page 333


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.4.2. GMM_Terminal COM port configuration


Run GMM Teleservice program
1) Press the “Start” button
2) Select Programs, Opera TeleService
3) Click on GMM Terminal
4) Open the “Utility” menu and select the “Config” option

4) Select the serial port COM5


5) Select the English language and press OK.
6) Exit from the window (press “Esci” button)
7) Exit from the program

WARNING:
For some PC hardware the COM serial ports could have different position and different COM
number. Please pay attention in order to configure the correct port number for the remote diagnostic
programs (GenWare and GMM Terminal).

Page 334 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.5. IIP remote diagnostic program configuration

ATTENTION:
This is a necessary step in order to enable the remote diagnostic capabilities.
Two different IIP programs configurations are possible: the first one have the access via local area
network, the second one give a modem access opportunity.
A valid gateway IP address is necessary to configure remote access via local area network.
Dial-out Prefix for calling numbers outside the hospital to configure remote access via modem.
Please Contact hospital network Administrator.

1) Close both service and clinical applications.


2) Be sure that you are logged in with a user that has administrative privilege (i.e. “serviceapp”).
3) Double click the proper icon “iLinq Shell”.

4) As a result the “iLinq Shell” function will start.

October 2009 Page 335


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION
If you want to close the “iLinq Shell” window:
Type “exit” in the command line and push “Enter” button.

5) Type in the command line, “iipadmin config” and push “Enter” button to start the interface
configuration. (See “Voyager_IIP_Installation_Steps_Using_IS.doc” for more details).

6) Please wait until the IIP configuration Stat Screen comes up (illustrated in the figure below).

InSite Configuration Start Screen

Page 336 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION
7) Click on “Accept” button on bottom right three times “Information” Screen as shown below
will be displayed.

InSite Instruction Screen


8) Click on ProDiags Tab on the top-left.

InSite Proactive Diagnostics Screen


9) Click on Default Button at the Bottom Right Hand Side Corner and wait until it moves
automatically to “Device Connection” screen.

October 2009 Page 337


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.5.1. Local Area Network configuration


If you want to configure a modem connection, go to the following paragraph.
1) For network configuration Select the Device Connection Type to be Network from available
selections.

For GMM site ONLY: 192 . 168 . 0 . 254

Network Device Configuration

2) Enter the Gateway IP Address. This is IP Address of the system that can connect to the
OnLine Center. Ask Hospital Network Administrator about it.
3) Make sure that the number entered in each box is only three digits and does not start with
zeroes.

Page 338 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION
4) Click on Apply Button.
5) Click OK button in the Network Readme Dialog that pops up.
6) Wait until Insite Checkout Screen (shown in the next figure) should be displayed
automatically.

7) Click on the Checkout Now Button and wait for a minute until Reboot Needed window pops
up
8) Click Cancel on the Configure Insite Now popup
9) Click on the Exit Button to exit IIPConfig Window
10) Click Ok button in the popup
11) Wait for a minute for prompt in the iLinQ Shell (Note: Don’t kill the window)
12) Enter Exit at the prompt
13) Reboot the System.
14) When Logon Dialog pops up enter
Username as serviceapp with the correct password
15) Click on the OK Button and Wait for a minute for application to start

October 2009 Page 339


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION
16) Close the Clinical and Service App Applications if they are started automatically.

Click on the Button to quit Service Application

Click on the button to quit Clinical Application (Platinum One)

17) Click on Cancel if any Modem Installation Wizards popup. (No for any modem installation)

9.5.2. Modem configuration

1) Under Device Connection Tab Select the Device Connection Type to be Modem from
available selections
2) Leave the Default Selections unchanged as shown below except if the dial-out prefix is
different. Note Following is Very Important
Dial out prefix is the number you dial (from hospital) before you dial long distance or
international phone number. Consult System Administrator for further information
3) Click on Apply
4) If any Dialog Box pops up asking Location Info enter details and click on OK Button.
5) When Phone and Modem options dialog should popup
6) If Multitech MT 5634ZBA already exists listening on Com1 select that. Remove any other
modem that exists. Select the modem and click on the remove button

Page 340 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION
7) If Multitech MT 5634ZBA does not exist.
a) Remove any other modem that exists. Select the modem and click on the remove button
Click on the Add Button.
b) In Add/Remove Hardware Wizard make Sure “Don’t detect my modem, I will select it
from a list” is checked and click on Next Button
c) Click on Have Disk button in the “Install New Modem” and the Browse button in the
Install From Disk popup
d) Change Directory to “C:\insite\inifiles\MultiTech”. Select “56ZBA-V” and Click on Open
Button
e) Click on Ok on the Install From Disk popup
f) Select “Multitech MT 5634ZBA” and Click on “Next>”
g) In the Next Screen Select “Selected Ports” Radio Button and then Select “COM1” Port and
Click on “Next>”
h) Click “Yes” if the Digital Signature Not Found Wizard pops up
j) Click on Finish Button
k) Select the only available option “Multitech MT 5634ZBA” attached to Com1 and Click on
OK Button
8) Click on OK in Install Modem popup
9) Wait until “set NVRAM Successful” message is seen at the bottom Status portion of the
window. Insite Checkout Screen (shown in the next figure) should be displayed
automatically.

10) Enter “InSite IP Address”. Contact OLE regarding this.


11) Leave “Router IP Address” as it is (0.0.0.0).

October 2009 Page 341


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION
12) Click on the “Checkout Now” Button and wait for a minute until Reboot Needed window
pops up
13) Click Ok on the popup
14) Click on the Exit Button to exit IIPConfig Window
15) Click Ok button in the popup
16) Wait for a minute for prompt in the iLinQ Shell (Note: Don’t kill the window)
17) Enter Exit at the prompt
18) Reboot the System.
19) When Logon Dialog pops up enter
Username as serviceapp with the correct password
20) Click on the OK Button and wait for a minute for application to start
21) Close the Clinical and Service App Applications if they are started automatically.
Click on the Button to quit Service Application

Click on the button to quit Clinical Application (Platinum One)

22) Click on Cancel if any Modem Installation Wizards popup. (No for any modem installation)

Page 342 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.5.3. Uninstall modems other than MT5634ZBA


To remove modem drivers that come by default along with the Infimed System:

1) Double Click on Control Panel Icon on Desktop


2) Double Click on Phone and Modem Options Icon in the Control Panel Window
3) Select the Modems Tab
4) Select all the modems except MultiTech MT5634ZBA Attached To COM1 one by one and
Remove them by clicking on the Remove button at the bottom

Note: Continue with the installation procedure from where you left

9.5.3.1. Disable modems other than MT5634ZBA


If Windows finds new hardware after rebooting and asks for installing the previous deleted modems,
please execute the following steps in order to disable the modem hardware.

1) Select “My Computer” with the right button of your mouse and select “Properties”.
2) Then select the “Hardware” tab and press on the “Device Manager” button.

October 2009 Page 343


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

3) Double click on the “Modem” device group and by pressing on the right button of your mouse
select each modem defined in this group which is different from the MT5634ZBA modem.
4) For each modem (except MultiTech MT5634ZBA) select the “Disable” option

5) If you are prompted the following, just select “Yes”

Page 344 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.5.4. Install the MT5634ZBA modem (only if necessary)


1) Switch off the PC. Connect the modem MT5634ZBA to the serial port COM1 and switch on
this component. When the modem is connected and switched on, you shall switch on also the
PC.
2) Log in as “serviceapp” with your password.
3) Close the Service Application and the Clinical Application. The following windows will be
displayed.

3a) Should not these windows appear, please select “My Computer” with the right button of your
mouse and select “Properties”.
3b) Then select the “Hardware” tab and press the “Device Manager” button.
3c) Select the device group “Modem” with the right button of your mouse
3d) Select the “Scan for hardware changes” option.

October 2009 Page 345


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION
4) As soon as Windows finds the MT5634ZBA modem, you shall see the following window

5) Select the Next button.


6) Then select the “Specify a location” check box and press “Next >”

7) Insert the “RXi Software CD” into the CD driver.

If you do not have the “RXi Software CD”, you can download the Modem driver from internet after
entering the following web site:
http://www.multitech.com/SUPPORT/Families/MultiModemZBA/drivers.asp

Page 346 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION
8) When the following window select the browse button.

9) Browse the RXi Software CD and select the “Multi-Tech_Modem_MT5634ZBA” directory.

10) Press the “OK” button

October 2009 Page 347


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.5.5. Checkout process

This step is necessary at the customer site.

Please refer document “Voyager_IIP_Installation_Steps_Using_IS.doc” for more details.

Page 348 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.6. DICOM entities configuration example

WARNING
This is a necessary step in order to enable the DICOM capabilities. Please note that the information
needed to complete this procedure must be requested to the on-site Network Administrator.

Log-in as an administrator user, run the “serviceapp” program

Select the “Config” button and the “DICOM” tab.

October 2009 Page 349


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.6.1. Setting up the DICOM CD


Should any error messages appear when you open the Configuration window, you shall just delete
the previous configured devices

Page 350 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

You shall click on the “Save” button to close the procedure.

October 2009 Page 351


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.6.2. DICOM storage

Should any error messages appear when you open the Configuration window, you shall just delete
the previous configured devices

DICOM_Store

Page 352 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

You shall click on the “Save” button to complete the procedure.

October 2009 Page 353


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.6.3. DICOM print


Should any error messages appear when you open the Configuration window, you shall just delete
the previous configured devices

Page 354 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

You shall click on the “Save” button to complete the procedure.

October 2009 Page 355


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.6.4. DICOM worklist

Before starting the following procedure, you shall verify the possible existence of any previous
Worklist drivers: select the “Name” menu and press the upward arrow several times in order to
make sure you reach the very first driver of the list: if you find the only name being available is
“Empty”, this means there is no Worklist device currently configured and you shall therefore proceed
according to the following steps:

You shall click on the “Save” button to complete the procedure.

Page 356 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 DIGITAL PC CONFIGURATION

9.7. Language selection


1. Log-in as the “ServiceApp” user.
2. Exit the Service Application and Clinical Application.
3. At the Windows desktop, you shall select START / SETTINGS / CONTROL PANEL.
4. Double click on the “Regional Options” icon.

5. Change the "Your Locale (location)" setting to select the appropriate language.

(Available languages: Dutch, English, French, German, Italian, Portuguese, Spanish.)

October 2009 Page 357


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR AND TOUCH SCREEN CONFIGURATION

10. Generator and touch screen configuration


10.1. Backup the license key
1) Switch on the touch panel and from “Main Menu” select “System Utilities”
2) Type the password to enable the “System Utilities” menu
3) Select the “Touch Screen Setup” option

4) Write down the license key just to be sure to have it.

5) In case you have not your license key (0000-0000-0000-0000) you need to ask for a new one

IF YOU DO NOT HAVE A LICENSE KEY:


DO NOT CONTINUE IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO ACCESS THE INTERNET DURING
INSTALLATION, OR IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO CONTACT CPI PRODUCT SUPPORT DURING
INSTALLATION

If you have an internet connection available, connect to the following site in order to obtain your
license key:

http://www.cpii.com/CMP/TouchLicWeb/TSLicenseKey.aspx
or
http://oldstuff.cpii.com/CMP/TouchLicWeb/TSLicenseKey.aspx

Page 358 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR AND TOUCH SCREEN CONFIGURATION

Enter the requested information in the Touch Screen License Key Generator screen.
Use the System Code number (example: 4C5E EA54 E43E 45A4) and the Customer Code number
(8662).
Type your e-mail address.
Clicking ? accesses the help function.
Click Submit when finished.

Record the license key when it is displayed. Double check that the license key was recorded correctly,
this is critical

A second way to have the License key is to send the following type of e-mail.

Email the System Code to one of the followings email addresses:


mike.loder@cmp.cpii.com; ken.vanravens@cmp.cpii.com
In the subject line type "license code needed”
In the message body type Precision RXi touch screen, v3.0.0 (or 3.0.x) software and the System Code.

October 2009 Page 359


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR AND TOUCH SCREEN CONFIGURATION

10.2. Verify the touch screen configuration

ATTENTION:
The Touch Screen should be already configured.

From the main menu window press “System Utilities” button.

Type the password to enable the following menu

Press the “Touch Screen Setup” button.

Page 360 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR AND TOUCH SCREEN CONFIGURATION

10.2.1. Communication with digital PC


Verify that the Digital Port for the communication with the digital PC is COM 2. Be sure to plug the
digital communication cable in the correct COM2 port.

COM 2

Use COM2 Use Port 0

Touch screen COM 2 port GIM Port 0

October 2009 Page 361


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR AND TOUCH SCREEN CONFIGURATION
Verify that in the “FEATURES” page the Digital PC button is selected.

If the program will ask you if you want to save the changes, please press the “Yes” button.

Page 362 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR AND TOUCH SCREEN CONFIGURATION

10.2.2. Touch screen receptor settings

ATTENTION:
The touch screen receptors should be already updated.

Only if needed, please set the appropriate picture for the receptors of the “Acquisition Mode” screen.

Press the “Main Menu” button in order to go back to the Main Menu screen

From the “Main menu” select “System Utilities” (remember the password) and from this menu, select
“Receptor Symbols”.

October 2009 Page 363


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR AND TOUCH SCREEN CONFIGURATION
Select the receptor symbol to change on the right set.
Select the appropriate receptor symbol from the list on the left
Press the button to move the left symbol on the right.

When complete, press the OK button and close the window.

The following is an example of receptor configuration for the RXi system

DSA

WARNING
Please note that for systems provided with the DSA, it is important that the DSA option is receptor
# 6 (please make reference to the location in the above picture).

Page 364 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR AND TOUCH SCREEN CONFIGURATION

10.2.3. Restore the current APR data


1) From the Main Menu press System Utilities. A pop up window will display asking you to
type a password.
2) From the System Utilities menu, press APR Backup / Restore. A pop-up window will
display showing the available backup files and the factory-default APR files in various
languages.

3) Select the APR data file to be restored. The selection will be highlighted.
4) Press Restore.
5) After a brief delay, a pop-up window will be displayed indicating that restore was successful.
6) Press OK to continue.

October 2009 Page 365


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR AND TOUCH SCREEN CONFIGURATION

10.3. Auto tube calibration

WARNING:
The tubes should be already calibrated.

WARNING:
The following procedures produce X-rays. Take all safety precautions to protect personnel from X-
radiation.

The Auto tube calibration function is present in the GenWare program.


The software use is only allowed to technical qualified personal and, furthermore, it is available only
to operators or administrators recognized by theirs proper password.

WARNING:
Deeper information about GenWare program isn’t the aim of the present manual.

Genware Utility main screen

CAUTION:
Always verify the manufacturer of the tube insert. If the X-ray tube has been rebuilt, the tube insert
and tube housing may be from different manufacturers.

Page 366 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 GENERATOR AND TOUCH SCREEN CONFIGURATION

WARNING:
Before starting the auto calibration procedure, close completely the collimator shutters in order to
avoid X-ray beams emission and damage the I.I. device

This utility allows for tube one or tube two to be calibrated for both focal sizes. When selected, the
generator is placed into auto calibration mode. The rad and fluoro settings are disabled at this time.
To start the tube calibration process, press and hold the X-ray exposure button. The exposure values
are shown in the Auto Tube Calibration window. When auto-calibration is completed on the currently
selected focus and tube, the process will stop. Repeat the above steps to calibrate the remaining focal
spot or tube.
Press Close to exit the tube calibration utility.
The tube calibration may be aborted by releasing the X-ray switch. In this case, an error is reported,
however, the process may then be restarted again or the utility may be exited.

By pressing the Tube function , the GenWare program will open the Auto tube calibration
window. Make reference to the following figure:

Auto tube calibration

October 2009 Page 367


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

11. Backup information


With the exception of Norton Ghost, it is necessary to be an administrator user for to run these
programs.
In order to restore information, please make reference to the service manual.

11.1. Creation of the destination directory


It is useful to create a separate directory in order to save backup files. The creation date of this
directory can help the technician to understand when the backup was made.

Double click on the “My Computer” icon. A window like the following will appear.

Double click on the “Local Disk (C:)” and select the option “Folder” from the menu File – New.
See the following picture.

Page 368 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

Type a properly name for the new directory. In the example we will use “Config_Backup”.

Save all the backup files decrypted in the following procedures in this folder and do not forget to copy
this directory also on a floppy disk.

October 2009 Page 369


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

11.2. Backup of the analogical systems


In order to perform an analogical system configuration backup it is necessary to have a laptop PC with
“Genware” and “GMM Terminal” diagnostic programs installed on it.
You also need a serial cable in order to connect the laptop PC to the Generator Touch Screen. Make
reference to the paragraph 11.4.2.1 for the serial cable specifications.

For the 12” Touch Screen: connect the serial cable to the J4 Datalink port Touch Screen (COM3).
For the 15” Touch Screen: connect the serial cable to the COM1 Touch Screen (in order to have the
Datalink function) or directly to the J15 generator CPU board.
For positioner: connect the serial cable to the CN3 positioner CPU board.

Follow the instructions described in the paragraphs 11.3 CPI generator backup, 11.4 APR backup and
11.6 Positioner parameters backup and save all the backup files on a floppy disk.

11.3. CPI generator backup


The following picture shows how to run the Genware program.

Page 370 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

11.3.1. Generator settings backup

Select as destination the


directory “Config_Backup”

October 2009 Page 371


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

11.3.2. Generator installation report backup

Select as destination the


directory “Config_Backup”

Page 372 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

11.3.3. Log error backup

Select as destination the


directory “Config_Backup”

October 2009 Page 373


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

11.4. APR backup

Please execute the backup of the APR file being used only if this one was modified by the User.

11.4.1. Backup the current APR data

1) Press “System Utilities” in the “Main menu”. A window will be displayed asking you to
enter your password.
2) In “System Utilities” menu, press APR Backup / Restore. A pop-up window will be
displayed showing the available backup files and the factory-default APR files in different
languages.

3) Press the “Backup” button.


4) A keyboard will be displayed on the screen.
5) You shall type the name of the new backup file.
6) Press the “Enter” button: you will be prompted the “APR Backup And Restore” menu again.
7) A window will be displayed informing you that the backup was executed successfully.
8) Press the “OK” button
9) Press “Close” to exit.

Page 374 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

11.4.2. Saving the APR files on a PC


WARNING:
If you have the old 12” touch screen version please follow the procedure at the chap. 11.4.2.1.
If you have the new 15” touch screen version, please follow the procedure at the chap. 11.4.2.2.

11.4.2.1. Working with the 12” touch screen


You must have some sort of serial communication program installed on your laptop PC. The serial
communication program must be capable of handling the Z-Modem serial protocol.
For example Windows HyperTerminal has this capability.

You must have also a standard serial cable for modem connections (null-modem). This is a description
of the electrical connection for this type of cable.

Common Null-Modem connection

October 2009 Page 375


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

Cable example:
use a Female DB-9 connector (Touch screen)
and a Female DB-9 connector (laptop PC)

Touch Screen connection (J4 Datalink) Example of a PC serial port COM1 connector
(J4 Datalink serial port COM3)

Run Windows “HyperTerminal”:


Select the menu “Start”, “Programs”, “Accessories”, “Communications” and “HyperTerminal”.

Page 376 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION
A window will appear and you will be requested to enter a name: you shall enter: Touch Screen
(please see the following picture) and then click on “OK”.

Next you have to select which serial communications port you would like to use. For a laptop this will
most likely be COM1. What you need to do is select the <Connect Using: COM1> option and press
the OK button. If you receive a message saying unable to open COM1 then close HyperTerminal and
repeat these steps but choose a different communication port.

NOTE: if you have selected all of the available communications ports in the list and all of them give
you an error message when you try to open them, make sure that you are not running any other
program that uses the serial port such as GenWare. If you are not running any serial port software
there is a possibility that your laptop does not have a serial port. If in this case you will require either
another laptop to perform this task or you will need to buy a PCMCIA Serial Port card from a local
computer store.

With some Windows versions


you can read “COM1” instead
of “Direct to Com1”

October 2009 Page 377


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION
After you have successfully selected the appropriate serial port, it is necessary to configure it.
The Touch Screen transmits the APR data file to the laptop over a serial link with the following
configuration. After you have setup your serial port to match the configuration in the image press the
OK button.

57600 Baud
No Parity
8 Data Bits
1 Stop Bit
Hardware Flow Control

From the Touch Screen Main Menu, press the SYSTEM UTILITIES button and type the password to
access the System Utilities menu.

Page 378 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

Select the file you want to send by highlighting it and press the bottom left button on the touch screen.

October 2009 Page 379


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION
A window will pop up automatically in the HyperTerminal window showing you the progress of the
transfer.

Click "OK" when prompted "Transfer Complete"


Click Close to return to the main menu.
Close the HyperTerminal.
Unplug the serial cable.

To restore an APR file make reference to the service manual.

11.4.2.2. Working with the 15” touch screen


From the Touch Screen Main Menu, press the SYSTEM UTILITIES button and type the password to
access the System Utilities menu.

From the system utilities menu, press APR Backup / Restore. A pop-up window will display showing
the available backup files and the factory-default APR files in various languages.

Page 380 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION
The APR USB file transfer utility allows APR files on the touch screen to be saved to a USB memory
stick device, or saved APR files on a USB memory stick device to be downloaded to the touch screen.

In order to use this feature, a USB memory stick device is required.

Insert
USB stick

Connect the USB memory stick to either USBA or USBB on the rear of the touch screen console and

press .

After a brief auto-detection sequence in which the touch screen looks for the USB key, the USB File
Transfer Utility window will open.

To copy an APR file from the touch screen to a USB memory stick device, select the desired file from

the Touch Screen window and press . Once the file is copied successfully it will appear in the
USB Device window of the USB File Transfer Utility.
When finished, press Close to exit.

October 2009 Page 381


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

11.5. Infimed digital PC backup

Run “Service Application”

Page 382 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

11.5.1. Calibration settings backup

Select “Config_Backup” as
destination directory.

October 2009 Page 383


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION
11.5.2. System and user configuration settings backup

Page 384 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

Select “Config_Backup” as
destination directory

Select “Config_Backup” as
destination directory

Select “Config_Backup” as
destination directory.

October 2009 Page 385


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

11.6. Positioner parameters backup


For more details about this remote diagnostic program see appropriate document
“Teleservice_V2.3.doc”.

Run “GMM Terminal” (“Start” button, “Programs” “GMM Teleservice”, “GMM Terminal”).

Be sure to use COM5


for the connection with
the positioner

Press the “Connect” button to initiate the connection with the table then press the Setup button and
type the password.

The setup window is shown in the following picture:

Page 386 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

Press the Backup button to perform the backup of the EEPROM data.
The program requests a password to perform this procedure. Type “123” in the password window and
press the “OK” button.

The program shows a window where you can type some information about the Positioner. These data
allow you to understand where the backup comes from.

October 2009 Page 387


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

All these information are mandatory but we recommend to insert properly information in the fields
“Serial N.”, “Customer”, “Date”, and “Signature”.
The others fields “Lot” and “Order” are used for GMM internal purpose.

Press the “OK” button to continue. The program shows the “Save As ...” window.

Select as destination the


directory “Config_Backup”

File Name:

Save As:

The file name is automatically build going by the serial number typed in the “Serial n” box of the
previous window. Is possible to change this file name but we do not recommend to do this.

Select the appropriate folder to save the file and press the “Save” button.

A message shows you if the backup was properly executed (see following picture).

Page 388 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

Press the “Exit” button to close the backup window.

October 2009 Page 389


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

11.7. GHOST: a complete system backup on CD-R/RW / DVD


This procedure (for digital systems only) will create a complete Hard Disk (HD) image on CD/DVD.
This could be useful in case of Hard Disk failure in order to rebuild the backup image on a new HD.

WARNING
If you have the Norton Ghost v.10 installed on your digital PC and you have also a CD with a
different Norton Ghost version (7.5 or 8.3), please do not use the Norton Ghost v.10 any more, but
make sure to use only the CD version.

To verify if the Norton Ghost 10 program is available on the PC, check if the symbol identifying
Norton Ghost is included in the bar of active applications (below on the right side)

or push the “Start” button , select the “Programs” option and verify
if it is present in the list of installed programs.

The number of CDs needed depends from the HD occupation and the type of data stored on it.
In a very approximate way the number of CD-R/RW required to perform a complete Hard Disk backup
can be estimated in one CD for every GByte of HD data (plus one CD).

1 Double click on “My Computer” icon;


2 In the window “My Computer” click by using mouse right button on the disk icon “Local
Disk (C:)” to let the contextual menu appear;
3 In the menu select the “Properties” option to visualize the space occupied on the disk (Used
Space);

4 Eliminate as many data as possible in order to reduce to used space;

WARNING:
If you have the Norton Ghost v.10 installed on your digital PC, please follow the procedure at chap.
11.7.1 page 391 .
If you have any other Norton Ghost version, please follow the procedure at chap. 11.7.2 page 393.

Page 390 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

11.7.1. Backup the system with Norton Ghost version 10


Make reference also to Norton Ghost manual.

Select “Start” button, Programs, Norton Ghost, Norton Ghost

Push “Back Up Now” button in order to start the backup procedure


Choose the backup configuration you want to execute from the list displayed as in the following
window. In this case, do select “Complete System Backup” and press “Back Up Now” button.

October 2009 Page 391


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION
During backup execution is possible meanwhile to go on using other programmes. For this reason a
“Performance” bar has been set. This bar can be moved from left to right side in order to increase or
decrease the backup execution speed to reach the open programmes balancing performance.

WARNING :
In this case is important not use other programmes during backup execution and move the bar to the
left side screen in order to reach maximum execution Ghost speed.

During backup execution one or more messages as for instance the one in the following window, will
be displayed. In this case replace the CD into the recorder player with a new CD to go on making data
saving.

At the backup end, close the following window by pushing the button “x” placed on the right upper
window side

Page 392 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

11.7.2. Backup the system with Norton Ghost version 7.5 or 8.3
These versions of Norton Ghost are not installed on the Hard Disk of digital PC but they are supplied
on floppy disk support (v. 7.5) or on CD (v.8.3).

WARNING:
In order to launch the execution program it is necessary that the floppy disk reader (Floppy Driver)
or the CD player (CD Driver) are devices able to execute the procedures of PC automatic boot-up
with a higher priority compared to the one of hard disk (Hard Disk).

In case the system is not configured as explained above, the insertion of disks in the related players
will not result into any effect and the system will keep on executing operative system Windows 2000.
The procedure to set PC boot up is described in paragraph 11.7.3 page 397.

To execute backup, please refer to the following procedure:

1. Insert CD or floppy disk in the correct player (CD or Floppy Device);


2. Execute the standard procedure for PC shut down or boot up;
3. Re-boot the PC with floppy disk or CD inserted in the proper player (driver);
4. If the Norton Ghost program is correctly executed keep on effecting the procedure (on the
contrary, make reference to paragraph 11.7.3 page 397);
5. After launching Norton Ghost program the following screen will be displayed (push OK to
continue);

October 2009 Page 393


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION
6. Select the menu Local -> Disk -> To Image;

7. The following screen will be displayed:

8. Push OK to continue;
9. In the following screen, select the CD drive in the “Look in”:

10. Click on the “Save” button;

Page 394 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION
11. Select the “Fast” button as displayed in the following screen:

12. Answer NO to the following question: “Copy a bootable floppy to the CD/DVD disk?”

13. Answer YES to the following question: “Proceed with Drive Backup to CD/DVD?” to any
other WARNING message;

14. If the CD with Norton Ghost has been left in the CD/DVD device, the following message
warning operator to insert a blank CD will appear:

October 2009 Page 395


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION
15. The following screen alerting that back up is in execution will appear:

16. When it is required, insert the other CDs/DVDs until back up is completed;

17. Take the last CD out and close the program by selecting in the menu the option “Quit”;
18. Re-boot the system;
19. Put the CDs in a safe place.

Page 396 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION

11.7.3. Make the computer bootable from the CD / floppy

Execute the following procedure, only in case the Norton Ghost program Ghost (v.7.5 or 8.3) IS NOT
automatically starting upon PC boot up.

1 Execute the standard procedure of PC shut down or re-boot;


2 Re-boot PC and press “F1” function button several times until when the BIOS configuration
window is displayed;

WARNING:
The aspect of BIOS configuration window is linked to the type and version of Motherboard. Indeed,
its aspect could also be different from what displayed in the following screens.

3 Select in the menu the “Boot” and “Boot Device Priority” option and then press “ENTER”.

4 The situation could be similar to the one shown in the picture where Hard Disk (HD) is the
second boot up device and therefore it is endowed with a higher priority compared to the CD
device;

Floppy disk

Hard disk

CD / DVD

5 The priority of CD device shall be increased so that it is higher compared to the one of Hard
Disk (HD);

October 2009 Page 397


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 BACKUP AND RESTORE INFORMATION
6 Select the second device of automatic boot up and press “Enter”;

CD / DVD

7 In the menu displayed in the middle of the window, select the CD/DVD device and press
“Enter”;
8 Now the CD priority should be set as higher compared to the one of Hard Disk (HD);

Floppy disk

CD / DVD

Hard disk

9 Press the function button F10 to exit and save configuration changes;

10 The PC will be restarted and will automatically execute the program that is registered in the
CD inserted in the CD/DVD player.

WARNING:
By using this PC configuration, in the case the CD with Norton Ghost is left inside the CD/DVD
player, the back up program is going to automatically start. This could confuse user or cause some
trouble. In order to avoid such risk, once the back up and restore procedure is terminated, we
recommend to set again the priority of automatic boot up on its original value.

Page 398 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CHINESE LABELS

12. Chinese labels


In case the Precision RXi system is destined to China, the following warning labels in Chinese must be
applied on the components listed here-below and they must be located as shown in the drawings.
These labels contain warning or any other caution messages informing users about situations or
conditions that can be dangerous and to which they have to pay particular attention.

Please find Chinese labels attached to the Chinese operator manual version

In the following paragraphs you will find on the left the standard English label supplied with each unit
and on the right the label with Chinese text: the latter must be stuck on the standard one as it is
indicated by drawings.

12.1. Touch screen label

T1
C1

T1
WARNING This X-ray unit may be dangerous to patient and operator unless safe exposure factors and operating instructions are observed

T1 警告 本X射线装置可能会危及患者和操作员,除非遵守安全曝光系数和操作说明书的要求

1. WARNING
C1 Do not connect items which are not specified parts of the system

2. ATTENTION
Ne accouplez pas Equipment que ne sont pas classifiée come parts
du system.

警告
请勿连接不是系统专用部件的项目.

October 2009 Page 399


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CHINESE LABELS

12.2. Generator labels

G1

G3

G2

高压
G1 G3 在面板打开或移开的情况下
会被接触到

G2

G1 G3

G2

Page 400 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 CHINESE LABELS

12.3. Monitor suspension label

M1

M1

October 2009 Page 401


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 APPENDIX

13. Appendix
13.1. Dip switches information
13.1.1. Positioner dip switches
The 25S3-Sw2 dip-switch is used to short-circuit the analogical input should not the relevant
transmission be present. Do not execute any adjustments of potentiometers or acquisitions of end-of-
strokes with reference potentiometer present and dip-switch being ON.
Make reference to the topographic drawing code 55308f.1 for the jumpers positions.

Switch-2 OFF ↓ ON ↑ Function Note


Sw2 - 1 Present Not Present Elevation potentiometer
Sw2 - 2 --- Not Present Analogical inputs not used Must be set ON
Sw2 - 3 Present Not Present Longitudinal tabletop potentiometer
Sw2 - 4 Present Not Present Iris potentiometer
Sw2 - 5 Present Not Present Jaws potentiometers
Sw2 - 6 Present Not Present Jaws potentiometers
Sw2 - 7 Present Not Present ADC13 not used Must be set ON
Sw2 - 8 Present Not Present ADC14 not used Must be set ON

JW4

Page 402 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 APPENDIX
Switch-1 OFF ↓ ON ↑ Function Note
Sw1 - 1 Normal Setup Functioning modality Normal use or use in the Setup phase
The Allarmax device ensures the
functioning of the equipment without
Sw1 – 2 Present Not Present Allarmax device intervention the error control by the software.
This must be used only if really needed
and necessary.
In case of bad functioning of the ASSI
board, the equipment can work but the
Sw1 – 3 Present Not Present ASSI board Focal Distance movement and all the
movements linked with the SFD will be
blocked.
When the “Low ceiling safety”
Sw1 – 4 Present Not Present Low ceiling safety accessory is present, the 25S3-Sw1.4
must be set onto the OFF position

Focal distance compensation (SID) 25 S3 B board

Jumper PRESENT NOT PRESENT


JW1 ON OFF
JW2 ON OFF

DO not change the configuration of these jumpers

Configuring 25S3-JW3 jumper for Injector Interface:

Jumper State Description


ON Injector interface NOT present
JW3
OFF Injector interface present

Please note that whenever the 25S4 board is present, you shall cut JW-3 jumper of the I/O board
(25S3)!

Configuring 25S3-JW4 jumper for Cassette Signal:

Jumper State Description


Wall bucky combined with table and ceiling
ON
suspension for manual collimator
JW4
Wall bucky combined with table and ceiling
OFF
suspension with automatic collimator

October 2009 Page 403


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 APPENDIX

13.1.2. Generator dip switches

See manual H895-04AM.doc par. 2.17.0 Dip Switch Settings

Sw1-3 Sw1-2 Sw1-1 GENERATOR POWER MAXIMUM mA


ON ↓ ON ↓ OFF ↑ 32 kW 400 mA
ON ↓ OFF ↑ ON ↓ 40 kW 500 mA
OFF ↑ ON ↓ ON ↓ 50 kW 630 mA
OFF ↑ ON ↓ OFF ↑ 65 kW 800 mA
OFF ↑ OFF ↑ ON ↓ 80 kW 1000 mA
OFF ↑ OFF ↑ OFF ↑ 100 kW 1000 mA

SW1-4 OFF ↑ > 2 FILAMENT BOARDS ON ↓ > 1 FILAMENT BOARD


SW1-5 OFF ↑ > 150 kV MAXIMUM ON ↓ > 125 kV MAXIMUM
SW1-6 OFF ↑ > DUAL SPEED STARTER ON ↓ > LOW SPEED STARTER
SW1-7 OFF ↑ > 2 TUBE GENERATOR ON ↓ > 1 TUBE GENERATOR
SW1-8 OFF ↑ > SET FACTORY DEFAULTS ON ↓ > DEFAULTS DISABLED

Page 404 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 APPENDIX

13.2. Sony DVD video recorder connection


13.2.1. Connection to the digital system version

Console PC

October 2009 Page 405


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 APPENDIX

13.2.2. Connection to the analogical 512 TV chain system version

Video 2

Console 512 TV

Set the DVD recorder “SETUP MENU” – “TV SYSTEM” with the value “PAL”

Page 406 October 2009


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14 APPENDIX

13.3. DAP printer connection


13.3.1. Label printer

TB7 TB10
0V (GND) 230 VAC Room Interface

Printer

55541

Touch Screen
56437

COM1

October 2009 Page 407


GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRECISION RXI SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
DIRECTION 5123446-100, REVISION 14

Notes:

Page 408 October 2009

You might also like